# CommandSection

title: SERVICE MANAGEMENT
content:
On modern Linux distributions using <i>systemd</i>, <i>gdm</i> is managed as a service. You can control its state using commands like <i>sudo systemctl start gdm</i>, <i>sudo systemctl stop gdm</i>, <i>sudo systemctl restart gdm</i>, or <i>sudo systemctl enable gdm</i> to ensure it starts on boot.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>gdm</i> was developed by the GNOME project as its default display manager, replacing the traditional <i>xdm</i> (X Display Manager) for a more user-friendly and feature-rich login experience. Its initial release coincided with early versions of the GNOME desktop environment. Over time, <i>gdm</i> has evolved to support new display technologies like Wayland, improve security, and integrate more deeply with <i>systemd</i> for service management. While its core function remains consistent, internal implementations have adapted to modern Linux desktop requirements, including better support for hardware acceleration and multi-seat configurations.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Run the GNOME Display Manager application</b>`gdm`<br><b>Prevent gdm from being run as a daemon background process</b>`gdm --nodaemon`<br><b>Disable gdm management of local console X servers for headless or remote environments</b>`gdm --no-console`<br><b>Prevent sanitizing environment variables that start with LD_</b>`gdm --preserve-ld-vars`<br><b>Display help</b>`gdm --help`<br><b>Display version</b>`gdm --version`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>nix-channel</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>SUBCOMMAND</i> [<i>ARGUMENTS</i>...]<br><br><b>nix-channel --add</b> <i>URL NAME</i><br><b>nix-channel --remove</b> <i>NAME</i><br><b>nix-channel --update</b> [<i>NAME</i>...]<br><b>nix-channel --list</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--add</b> <i>URL NAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a new Nix channel. <i>URL</i> is the web address pointing to the channel's Nix expressions (e.g., a Git repository or tarball URL), and <i>NAME</i> is a local identifier for the channel (e.g., 'nixpkgs', 'nixos').<br><br><b><b>--remove</b> <i>NAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes the specified channel identified by <i>NAME</i> from the list of subscribed channels. This means the packages defined by that channel will no longer be considered for updates.<br><br><b><b>--update</b> [<i>NAME</i>...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Fetches the latest Nix expressions for one or more specified channels. If no <i>NAME</i> is provided, all currently subscribed channels are updated. This operation downloads new Nix expressions but does not install or update packages themselves.<br><br><b><b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all currently subscribed Nix channels, showing their local name and the URL they point to.<br><br><b><b>--dry-run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used with <b>--update</b>, this option shows what channels would be updated without actually performing the update. Useful for previewing changes.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with usage information for the <b>nix-channel</b> command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>nix-channel</b> command is a crucial utility within the Nix package manager ecosystem, designed to manage <i>channels</i>. Nix channels are essentially URLs pointing to a collection of Nix expressions, which define a consistent set of packages available at a given time. Users subscribe to channels to receive updates for their Nix packages. For instance, the 'nixos' channel represents the official NixOS distribution, while 'nixpkgs' is the primary collection of packages.<br><br><b>nix-channel</b> allows users to add new channels, remove existing ones, list currently subscribed channels, and most importantly, update them. When a channel is updated, <b>nix-channel</b> fetches the latest set of Nix expressions from the channel's URL, making newer versions of packages available for installation or upgrade via commands like <b>nix-env -u</b>. This mechanism ensures that users can easily track and consume the latest stable or unstable package sets provided by the Nix community or their own organizations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Channels can become quite large, and updating them (especially the first time or after a long period) can involve significant data transfer. While <b>nix-channel --update</b> fetches new expressions, it does not automatically upgrade your installed packages; for that, you typically run <b>nix-env -u</b> or rebuild your NixOS system. Mixing channels from different sources or maturity levels (e.g., stable and unstable) can sometimes lead to dependency conflicts or unexpected behavior.


title: HOW CHANNELS WORK
content:
A Nix channel is essentially a Git repository or a tarball containing Nix expressions. When you 'update' a channel, <b>nix-channel</b> downloads the latest version of this repository/tarball and stores it in your Nix user profile (typically <i>~/.nix-channels</i>). This updated local copy is then used by other Nix commands (like <b>nix-env</b>) to determine which packages and versions are available. Channels are versioned, often tied to specific Git commits or dates, ensuring that the set of packages they define is coherent and reproducible.


title: USER-SPECIFIC MANAGEMENT
content:
By default, <b>nix-channel</b> operates on a per-user basis. Each user on a Nix system maintains their own set of subscribed channels in their home directory. This means that adding or updating channels by one user does not affect the channels managed by another user or the system-wide NixOS configuration, unless the command is run with root privileges or within the NixOS configuration build process.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>nix-channel</b> command has been a fundamental component of the Nix package manager since its early days. It emerged as a solution to efficiently distribute and manage consistent sets of Nix expressions, enabling the purely functional deployment model Nix is known for. Its design reflects the need for reproducible builds and atomic upgrades across different user environments. Over time, while the underlying channel mechanism has remained robust, enhancements have focused on performance and usability, ensuring it continues to serve as the primary gateway for users to access and update the vast Nix package collection.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>List current channels</b>`nix-channel --list`<br><b>Add a channel</b>`nix-channel --add [https://nixos.org/channels/nixpkgs-unstable]`<br><b>Update package list of all channels</b>`nix-channel --update`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-k</b>, <b>-no-pass</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not ask for a password. Use a blank password or Kerberos (ticket cache) for authentication.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>-hashes</b> <I>LMHASH:NTHASH</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;NTLM hashes for authentication (LMHASH:NTHASH format). Provide ':' for a blank LM hash.<br><br><b><b>-aesKey</b> <I>hexKey</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;AES key for Kerberos authentication (128 or 256 bits) in hexadecimal format.<br><br><b><b>-dc-ip</b> <I>IP address</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;IP address of the domain controller to use for Kerberos authentication.<br><br><b><b>-debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Turns on debug output for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>-ip</b> <I>IP address</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;IP address of the target machine. If not specified, the targetName is resolved.<br><br><b><b>-port</b> <I>port number</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;SMB port to connect to (default: 445).<br><br><b><b>-rpc-port</b> <I>port number</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;RPC port to connect to for service creation/management (default: 445).<br><br><b><b>-share</b> <I>SHARE_NAME</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Share to connect to on the target for file transfer (default: C$). Typical shares are ADMIN$ or C$.<br><br><b><b>-codec</b> <I>codec</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the target system's locale codec for output decoding (e.g., 'latin-1', 'cp850').<br><br><b><b>-shell-type</b> <I>shell</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the shell type to use: 'cmd', 'powershell', or 'wmi'. Default is 'cmd'.<br><br><b><b>-outputfile</b> <I>filename</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Redirects the command's output to a specified file instead of stdout.<br><br><b><b>-full-gen-out</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Return the output without decoding to the system's locale codec, providing raw output.<br><br><b><b>-wmi-timeout</b> <I>seconds</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;WMI connection timeout in seconds (default: 5).<br><br><b><b>-delay</b> <I>milliseconds</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delay in milliseconds after starting the remote service (default: 0).<br><br><b><b>-silent</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not show progress messages during execution.<br><br><b><b>-console</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to the console session for interactive shells.<br><br><b><b>-no-shell</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not create an interactive shell; just run the specified command and exit.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <I>command</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a command string to execute (instead of entering an interactive shell).<br><br><b><b>-x</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run a local command. Only works if <b>-c</b> is also used; executes a local command after remote execution.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete the temporary file and service created on the target after execution.<br><br><b><b><targetName or address></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The target hostname or IP address of the remote Windows system.<br><br><b><b>[command]</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The command string to execute on the remote host. If not provided, an interactive shell is attempted.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>psexec.py</b> is a Python script from the Impacket toolkit that allows executing commands on remote Windows systems. It mimics the functionality of Microsoft's PsExec utility by leveraging the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.<br><br>It typically works by creating a temporary service on the target machine, executing the specified command through that service, and then removing the service. This tool is widely used by penetration testers and security professionals for lateral movement, remote administration, and post-exploitation activities in Windows environments. It supports various authentication methods, including password-based, NTLM hashes, and Kerberos. Its primary advantage is its ability to operate without installing any client software on the target, relying solely on built-in Windows services.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>Requires administrative privileges on the target Windows system.</li><li>The target system must have the Server service running, SMB port 445 accessible, and remote administration enabled.</li><li>Can be detected by Antivirus (AV) and Endpoint Detection and Response (EDR) solutions due to its service creation and remote execution methods.</li><li>Firewall rules on the target or network can prevent successful connections.</li><li>User Account Control (UAC) on the target can interfere, especially for non-built-in administrator accounts.</li></ul>


title: COMMON USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
To execute `dir C:\` on a remote host `192.168.1.100` using user `administrator` with password `Password123!`:<br>
`psexec.py administrator:Password123!@192.168.1.100 "cmd.exe /c dir C:\"`<br><br>
To get an interactive shell with NTLM hashes (LMHASH:NTHASH), assuming an NTHASH of <i>31d6cfe0d16ae931b73c59d7e0c089c0</i> for user 'guest' and a blank LM hash:<br>
`psexec.py -hashes :31d6cfe0d16ae931b73c59d7e0c089c0 guest@192.168.1.100`


title: SERVICE CREATION MECHANISM
content:
<b>psexec.py</b> typically uploads a small executable (or uses built-in features for WMI/PowerShell shells) to the target's `ADMIN$` or `C$` share. It then creates a temporary Windows service configured to execute this payload. After the command runs and its output is captured, the tool cleans up by deleting the temporary service and the executable. This transient nature makes it powerful for remote operations without leaving persistent traces.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>psexec.py</b> is a key component of the <i>Impacket</i> library, which was developed by Core Security Technologies (now Fortra) and later became an open-source project. Impacket is a collection of Python classes that focus on providing programmatic access to network protocols, particularly those used in Microsoft Windows environments (SMB, MSRPC, Kerberos, etc.). <b>psexec.py</b> specifically emerged as a Python-based alternative to Microsoft's original PsExec utility, offering cross-platform compatibility and greater flexibility for security professionals to script and automate tasks, especially in penetration testing and red teaming scenarios. Its development has mirrored the increasing need for reliable remote execution capabilities in environments where traditional tools might be blocked or less versatile.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Spawn an interactive shell on a remote target</b>`psexec.py [domain]/[username]:[password]@[target]`<br><b>Execute a specific command on a remote target</b>`psexec.py [domain]/[username]:[password]@[target] [command]`<br><b>Copy the filename for later execution, arguments are passed in the command</b>`psexec.py -c [filename] [domain]/[username]:[password]@[target] [command]`<br><b>Execute a command from a specific path on a remote target</b>`psexec.py -path [path] [domain]/[username]:[password]@[target] [command]`<br><b>Authenticate using pass-the-hash authentication instead of a password</b>`psexec.py -hashes [LM_Hash]:[NT_Hash] [domain]/[username]@[target]`<br><b>Use Kerberos authentication for the target</b>`psexec.py -k -no-pass [domain]/[username]@[target]`<br><b>Specify the IP address of the domain controller</b>`psexec.py -dc-ip [domain_controller_ip] [domain]/[username]:[password]@[target]`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>jj git clone</b> [OPTIONS] &lt;REMOTE-URL&gt; [DESTINATION]<br><br><I>Arguments:</I><br><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>&lt;REMOTE-URL&gt;</b>: The URL of the Git repository to clone.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>[DESTINATION]</b>: Optional path for the new repository. Defaults to the last component of the URL.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--at-op=<REV></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restore the repository to the state at the given operation ID after cloning.<br><br><b>--branch <NAME></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a particular branch to clone instead of the remote's default branch.<br><br><b>--config-toml <TOML></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide a TOML string to be added to the new repository's <i>config.toml</i>.<br><br><b>--cwd <PATH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Change the current working directory before executing the command.<br><br><b>--git-remote <NAME></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assign a custom name to the Git remote, instead of the default 'origin'.<br><br><b>--git-args <ARG>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Pass additional, arbitrary arguments directly to the underlying <b>git clone</b> command.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help information for this command or its subcommands.<br><br><b>-r, --revision <REV></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Check out a specific revision (change ID or branch name) in the new repository.<br><br><b>-s, --sparse</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initialize the cloned repository with a sparse checkout, only downloading specified files.<br><br><b>--template <NAME></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply a predefined template configuration to the new repository.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output to show detailed information during the cloning process.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>jj-git-clone</b> is a command from the Jujutsu (jj) version control system, designed to clone a Git repository and initialize it as a new Jujutsu repository. It functions as the <b>git clone</b> equivalent within the Jujutsu ecosystem, allowing users to seamlessly transition from an existing Git project to working with Jujutsu.<br><br>When executed, it fetches the Git repository's history and converts it into Jujutsu's internal data model, making all Git commits accessible as Jujutsu changes. This command is crucial for integrating Jujutsu into workflows that involve existing Git repositories, enabling users to leverage Jujutsu's unique features, such as rebase by default, explicit conflicts, and operation logs, while maintaining compatibility with remote Git repositories for pushing and pulling. It handles the initial setup, including configuring the Git remote, simplifying the process of migrating or coexisting with Git.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li>The command internally uses <b>git clone</b>. If <b>git</b> is not installed or not in the system's PATH, <b>jj-git-clone</b> will fail.</li><li>While <b>jj</b> maintains compatibility with Git remotes, some advanced Git features (like submodules) might require specific handling or may not be fully supported directly by <b>jj</b>'s data model.</li><li>The cloned repository will be a Jujutsu repository, meaning subsequent operations will use <b>jj</b> commands, not <b>git</b> commands, unless explicitly prefixed (e.g., <b>jj git push</b>).</li></ul>


title: WORKING WITH GIT REMOTES
content:
After cloning, the Jujutsu repository remains linked to the original Git remote. Users can use <b>jj git fetch</b> to pull updates from the Git remote and <b>jj git push</b> to push local changes back to the Git remote.


title: JUJUTSU AND GIT COMPATIBILITY
content:
While <b>jj-git-clone</b> creates a Jujutsu repository, the underlying <i>.git</i> directory might still exist (depending on <b>jj</b>'s internal implementation details). The key is that <b>jj</b> interacts with Git remotes by converting between <b>jj</b>'s internal state and Git's commit graph. This allows co-existence and gradual adoption.


title: HISTORY
content:
Jujutsu (jj) is a relatively new version control system, developed by Martin Ågren, aiming to provide a more intuitive and powerful workflow than Git, while maintaining compatibility with Git repositories. The <b>jj-git-clone</b> command was introduced as a fundamental part of Jujutsu from its early development, recognizing the need for seamless integration with the vast existing ecosystem of Git repositories. Its design reflects Jujutsu's philosophy of building on top of Git's strengths while improving upon its user experience, particularly concerning mutable history and explicit state. It allows <b>jj</b> to act as an alternative frontend to Git.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Create a new repo backed by a clone of a Git repo into a new directory (the default directory is the repository name)</b>`jj git clone [source] [path/to/directory]`<br><b>Create a clone and use the given name for newly created remote</b>`jj git clone --remote [remote_name] [source]`<br><b>Clone a Git repo, only fetching the 10 most recent commits</b>`jj git clone --depth [10] [source]`<br><b>Clone colocating the Jujutsu repo with the Git repo (allowing the use of both jj and git commands in the same directory)</b>`jj git clone --colocate [source]`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>REMOTE...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more names of the remote repositories to fetch from (e.g., <i>origin</i>, <i>upstream</i>). If no remote is specified, <b>jj-git-fetch</b> will typically fetch from all configured remotes, mirroring the behavior of <b>git fetch</b> without a specified remote.<br><br><b>OPTIONS...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;These are primarily options passed directly to the underlying <b>git fetch</b> command. <b>jj-git-fetch</b> acts as a wrapper, forwarding these arguments. Common and important options include:<br><i><b>--all</b></i>: Fetch from all remotes.<br><i><b>--prune</b></i> or <i><b>-p</b></i>: After fetching, remove any remote-tracking branches which no longer exist on the remote.<br><i><b>--tags</b></i>: Fetch all tags from the remote.<br><i><b>--no-tags</b></i>: Do not fetch tags, even if configured to.<br><i><b>--dry-run</b></i> or <i><b>-n</b></i>: Show what would be fetched without actually performing the fetch.<br><i><b>--quiet</b></i> or <i><b>-q</b></i>: Suppress progress messages, showing only errors.<br><i><b>--verbose</b></i> or <i><b>-v</b></i>: Be more verbose, showing details of what is being fetched.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>jj-git-fetch</b> command is a specialized subcommand within the Jujutsu (<i>jj</i>) version control system. It serves as a bridge to the underlying Git repository, allowing users to fetch updates from remote Git repositories directly into the <i>jj</i>'s Git backend. Essentially, it executes the standard <b>git fetch</b> command with the provided arguments and options.<br><br>While <i>jj</i> offers higher-level commands like <b>jj pull</b> (which often includes fetching and rebasing), <b>jj-git-fetch</b> provides direct control over the fetching process, mirroring Git's behavior. This updates the local Git repository's remote-tracking branches (e.g., <i>origin/main</i>), making new commits from the remote available to <i>jj</i> for subsequent operations like updating, rebasing, or merging.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>jj-git-fetch</b> only updates the underlying Git repository and its remote-tracking branches. It does not automatically modify your current <i>jj</i> working copy, update local branches, or rebase your history. To integrate fetched changes into your active <i>jj</i> branches, you typically need to follow up with <b>jj update</b>, <b>jj rebase</b>, or use the higher-level <b>jj pull</b> command.


title: INTERACTION WITH JUJUTSU'S GRAPH
content:
While <b>jj-git-fetch</b> updates the underlying Git repository, <i>jj</i> maintains its own internal representation of the commit graph. After a fetch, new commits from the remote will appear in <i>jj</i>'s graph view (e.g., using <b>jj log</b>), typically as remote-tracking branches (e.g., <i>origin/main</i>). These commits are then available for <i>jj</i>'s powerful history manipulation and collaboration features, but require explicit <i>jj</i> commands to integrate into local branches.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>jj-git-fetch</b> is an integral part of the Jujutsu (<i>jj</i>) version control system, which was designed as a modern, user-friendly alternative to Git, built on top of Git repositories. Introduced as part of <i>jj</i>'s core functionality, this command provides a direct interface for synchronizing the <i>jj</i> repository with its upstream Git remotes. Its development reflects <i>jj</i>'s philosophy of leveraging Git's robust backend while offering a more intuitive command-line experience. It ensures compatibility and interoperability with existing Git workflows, making it a crucial component for any <i>jj</i> user interacting with external Git repositories.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Fetch the latest changes from the default remote repository</b>`jj git fetch`<br><b>Fetch the latest changes from a given remote repository</b>`jj git fetch --remote [remote]`<br><b>Fetch the latest changes only from given branches</b>`jj git fetch [[-b|--branch]] [branch]`<br><b>Fetch the latest changes from all remotes</b>`jj git fetch --all-remote`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>[REVISIONS...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional. A list of target revisions to absorb changes into. If omitted, changes are absorbed into the current commit. Can be combined with `--from`.<br><br><b>--from <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the source commit(s) from which changes should be absorbed. If omitted, changes from the working copy are used.<br><br><b>--into <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the target commit(s) into which changes should be absorbed. If omitted, changes are absorbed into the current commit.<br><br><b>--all</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Absorb changes from all descendant commits of the target that also descend from the source.<br><br><b>--edit, -e</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Open an editor to modify the commit message of the target commit(s) and resolve conflicts.<br><br><b>--insert, -i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;If changes cannot be fully absorbed into existing commits, insert new commits as necessary.<br><br><b>--dry-run</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform a trial run without making any changes, showing what would happen.<br><br><b>--branch <NAMES></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A comma-separated list of branch names to consider for the absorb operation's scope.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>jj absorb</i> is a fundamental command in the Jujutsu (<i>jj</i>) version control system, designed to integrate modifications into existing commits. Unlike traditional version control systems where commits are immutable, <i>jj</i> allows for an "editable history." The `absorb` command facilitates this by taking uncommitted changes from the working copy and incorporating them into the current commit, or by moving changes from descendant commits (children) into their ancestors. This makes it incredibly powerful for refactoring history, iteratively developing features, and tidying up commit messages or content. It essentially acts as a flexible rebase or commit-amend operation, but with more fine-grained control over which changes go where in the commit graph. It's often used when you've made further edits related to a previous commit, or when you want to consolidate changes across several dependent commits.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>jj absorb</i> rewrites history, creating new commits with new change IDs. This can lead to conflicts if not handled carefully, especially when collaborating or if changes are already pushed. Conflicts may require manual resolution using <i>jj resolve</i> or external merge tools.


title: INTERACTIVE REFINEMENT
content:
<i>jj absorb</i> is excellent for iterative development. As you refine a feature, you can continuously absorb new changes back into the original commit, keeping your history clean and focused without needing to create many "fixup" commits.


title: CONFLICT RESOLUTION
content:
If conflicts arise during absorption, <i>jj</i> will typically mark the repository as conflicted. You'll need to resolve these manually using <i>jj resolve</i> or external merge tools before completing the operation. The `--edit` flag can assist in this process.


title: HISTORY
content:
Jujutsu (<i>jj</i>) is a relatively new distributed version control system, developed by Google, first publicly released around 2022. It aims to provide a more intuitive and powerful workflow for managing changes compared to traditional systems like Git, especially concerning history editing. <i>jj-absorb</i> is a core command reflecting <i>jj</i>'s design philosophy of an "editable history." It was conceived as a fundamental operation to allow users to incrementally refine their work by moving changes between related commits without resorting to complex rebase interactions. Its development is intertwined with the evolution of <i>jj</i> itself, making it a central pillar of the system's workflow.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Move all eligible and unambiguous changes from a revision to other revisions automatically</b>`jj absorb [[-f|--from]] [revset] [[-t|--into]] [revsets]`<br><b>Move only changes in given files from a revision to other revisions</b>`jj absorb [[-f|--from]] [revset] [[-t|--into]] [revsets] [filesets]`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>create</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Creates</I> a new Pulumi organization.<br><br><b><b>delete</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Deletes</I> an existing Pulumi organization. This action is irreversible.<br><br><b><b>disable</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Disables</I> an organization, preventing new stack updates or deployments within it.<br><br><b><b>edit</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Edits</I> general settings of an organization, such as its display name or description.<br><br><b><b>feature</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages <I>feature</I> flags and experimental capabilities for an organization.<br><br><b><b>get</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Retrieves</I> detailed information about a specific organization, including its ID and current status.<br><br><b><b>invite</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Invites</I> a user to join an organization, typically via their email address.<br><br><b><b>list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Lists</I> all organizations the current authenticated user is a member of.<br><br><b><b>member</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides further subcommands for comprehensive management of organization <I>member</I>s and their assigned roles.<br><br><b><b>patch</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Patches</I> specific settings of an organization, applying partial updates.<br><br><b><b>remove</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Removes</I> a user from an organization's membership.<br><br><b><b>rename</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Renames</I> an existing organization.<br><br><b><b>role</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides subcommands for managing organization <I>role</I>s and their associated permissions.<br><br><b><b>settings</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages various organization-wide <I>settings</I>, including billing, security, and integration configurations.<br><br><b><b>url</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the Pulumi Cloud <I>URL</I> for a given organization, allowing direct access to its web console.<br><br><b><b>validate</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Validates</I> the state or configuration of an organization.<br><br><b><b>upgrade</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Upgrades</I> an organization's plan or enables specific premium features.<br><br><b><b>audit-log</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Accesses the <I>audit log</I> for an organization, providing a history of significant actions.<br><br><b><b>search</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Searches</I> for resources, stacks, or other entities within an organization.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <I>pulumi org</I> command is a fundamental subcommand within the Pulumi Command Line Interface (CLI), designed specifically for the management of Pulumi organizations. In the Pulumi ecosystem, organizations serve as logical containers for projects, stacks, and users, facilitating collaborative infrastructure management and resource isolation. This command empowers administrators and team leads to perform a variety of crucial tasks, including the creation of new organizations, renaming existing ones, inviting and removing members, and retrieving detailed information about organization settings and activity.<br><br>It plays a vital role in enabling team collaboration, enforcing access control policies, and segregating cloud resources across different teams or environments. The <I>pulumi org</I> command interacts directly with the Pulumi Cloud backend or a self-hosted Pulumi service to maintain the state of organizations, manage user permissions, and ensure proper governance of infrastructure as code. Successful execution of these commands typically requires the user to possess appropriate administrative permissions within the Pulumi service.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <I>pulumi org</I> command is a subcommand of the main <B>pulumi</B> CLI tool, not a standalone Linux command. It requires the Pulumi CLI to be installed and properly configured, including authentication with a Pulumi backend (Pulumi Cloud or a self-hosted service). Actions performed with this command are subject to the user's permissions within the Pulumi organization. Operations like <B>pulumi org delete</B> are irreversible and should be used with extreme caution.


title: GLOBAL PULUMI CLI OPTIONS
content:
Many Pulumi CLI commands, including <I>pulumi org</I> and its subcommands, support a set of global options that can modify their behavior across the entire CLI. While not specific to <I>pulumi org</I>, these are often used in conjunction with it:<br><ul><li><b>--json</b>: Emits command output in JSON format, useful for scripting and automation.</li><li><b>--non-interactive</b>: Disables interactive prompts, making the command suitable for automated environments.</li><li><b>--debug</b>: Enables verbose debug logging for troubleshooting.</li><li><b>--logtostderr</b>: Directs log output to stderr.</li><li><b>--tracing</b>: Enables OpenTracing for command execution.</li><li><b>--verbose</b>: Enables verbose output.</li></ul>


title: BACKEND INTERACTION
content:
The <I>pulumi org</I> command operates by communicating with a Pulumi backend. By default, this is the Pulumi Cloud (<B>app.pulumi.com</B>), but it can also be a self-hosted Pulumi Service instance. The command's ability to create, modify, or delete organizations and their members is entirely dependent on a successful connection and authentication with the configured backend, and the user's granted permissions within that backend.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>pulumi org</I> command set emerged as part of the Pulumi platform's evolution to support enterprise-grade infrastructure-as-code deployments. Pulumi, founded in 2017 with its open-source CLI and cloud service launched in 2018, rapidly introduced capabilities for team collaboration and multi-user environments. The <I>org</I> commands were specifically developed to enable organizations to manage shared cloud resources, enforce access control policies through roles, and segregate development, staging, and production environments effectively. Its functionality has continuously expanded, incorporating features like audit logging and more granular security settings, to meet the growing demands for governance and operational visibility in cloud resource management.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Display the default organization and current backend</b>`pulumi org`<br><b>Display the default organization</b>`pulumi org get-default`<br><b>Set the default organization</b>`pulumi org set-default [organization_name]`<br><b>Search for resources in Pulumi Cloud using Pulumi AI with a plaintext natural language query</b>`pulumi org search ai [[-q|--query]] "[show me all load balancers in my organization]"`<br><b>Display help</b>`pulumi org [[-h|--help]]`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>sccache</b> is typically used as a compiler wrapper by setting environment variables or configuring build systems:<br>  <i>export RUSTC_WRAPPER=sccache</i><br>  <i>export CC=sccache CXX=sccache</i><br><br>For direct command-line operations and cache management:<br>  <b>sccache</b> <i>[OPTIONS] [COMMAND [ARG...]]</i><br>  <b>sccache</b> <i>--show-stats</i><br>  <b>sccache</b> <i>--zero-stats</i><br>  <b>sccache</b> <i>--start-server</i><br>  <b>sccache</b> <i>--stop-server</i><br>  <b>sccache</b> <i>--wipe</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>--help</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the command's help message and available options.<br><br><b><i>--version</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the <b>sccache</b> version information.<br><br><b><i>--show-stats</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows detailed statistics about cache hits, misses, size, and compilation times.<br><br><b><i>--zero-stats</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Resets all collected cache statistics to zero.<br><br><b><i>--start-server</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the <b>sccache</b> daemon in the background to manage the cache efficiently.<br><br><b><i>--stop-server</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sends a signal to stop the running <b>sccache</b> server daemon.<br><br><b><i>--kill-server</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forcefully terminates the <b>sccache</b> server daemon process.<br><br><b><i>--purge</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Clears the entire <b>sccache</b> cache, removing all stored compilation results.<br><br><b><i>--clean</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes older, less frequently accessed cache entries to free up disk space.<br><br><b><i>--cache-dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the path to the directory where <b>sccache</b> stores its cache files.<br><br><b><i>--stats-json</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays cache statistics in a machine-readable JSON format.<br><br><b><i>--log-level &lt;LEVEL&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the verbosity level for logging messages (e.g., <i>debug</i>, <i>info</i>, <i>warn</i>, <i>error</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>sccache</b> is a high-performance compiler wrapper and caching tool, similar to <i>ccache</i>, developed by Mozilla. It significantly accelerates build times for projects written in languages like C/C++, Rust, Go, and D by caching compilation results.<br><br>When <b>sccache</b> is used in place of the actual compiler, it first calculates a hash of the compiler inputs (source code, arguments, environment variables). It then checks its cache for a matching result. If a hit is found, the cached output is retrieved, significantly reducing a full recompile. If a miss occurs, <b>sccache</b> invokes the real compiler, stores the new compilation result in its cache, and then returns it.<br><br><b>sccache</b> supports various cache backends, including local disk, Amazon S3, Google Cloud Storage, and Azure Blob Storage, making it highly versatile for both local development and large-scale continuous integration (CI/CD) environments. It can operate as a persistent server daemon for optimal performance and shared caching.


title: CAVEATS
content:
For optimal performance, <b>sccache</b> typically requires a persistent server daemon to be running. While robust, complex or non-standard compiler invocation patterns might require specific configuration or workarounds. Changes in compiler versions or environment variables not fully captured by its hashing mechanism could potentially lead to cache misses or, in rare cases, stale cache entries.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE CONFIGURATION
content:
<b>sccache</b> relies heavily on environment variables for configuration. Examples include <i>SCCACHE_DIR</i> for cache location, <i>SCCACHE_CACHE_SIZE</i> for cache size limits, and specific variables like <i>SCCACHE_S3_BUCKET</i>, <i>SCCACHE_GCS_BUCKET</i>, or <i>SCCACHE_AZURE_BLOB_CONTAINER</i> for configuring cloud storage backends. These variables allow granular control over cache behavior and seamless integration with various storage solutions.


title: SERVER MODE OPERATION
content:
For maximum efficiency, <b>sccache</b> should be run as a background server using <i>sccache --start-server</i>. This daemon manages the cache, handles concurrent compilation requests, and significantly reduces the overhead of starting a new <b>sccache</b> process for every compilation. Client processes then communicate with this central server, leveraging shared cache resources for faster builds.


title: SUPPORTED LANGUAGES AND COMPILERS
content:
<b>sccache</b> is designed to work with various compiler toolchains, including GCC and Clang for C/C++, <i>rustc</i> for Rust, <i>go build</i> for Go, and <i>dmd</i> for D. Its flexible design allows it to be integrated into diverse build environments and projects across different programming languages, making it a versatile tool for build acceleration.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>sccache</b> was initially developed by Mozilla, written in Rust, to address the growing need for faster build times, particularly for large projects like Firefox and its extensive Rust codebase. It emerged as a modern alternative to existing compiler caches like <i>ccache</i>, offering enhanced performance, support for Rust's compiler (<i>rustc</i>), and versatile cloud-based storage backend options. Its design prioritized reliability and efficiency in continuous integration (CI/CD) pipelines, leading to its widespread adoption beyond its original Mozilla context.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Show compilation statistics</b>`sccache [[-s|--show-stats]]`<br><b>Run gcc (or any compiler command) through sccache</b>`sccache gcc [path/to/file.c]`<br><b>Start sccache server in the foreground and print logs</b>`sccache --stop-server; SCCACHE_LOG=trace SCCACHE_START_SERVER=1 SCCACHE_NO_DAEMON=1 sccache`<br><b>Ask scheduler for distributed compilation status</b>`sccache --dist-status`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>N/A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;No standard parameters defined for this non-existent command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>filen</b> command is not a standard or widely recognized utility in common Linux distributions. It is highly probable that it is a typographical error, possibly intended to be <b>file</b> (which identifies file types) or <b>find</b> (which searches for files and directories).<br><br>If <b>filen</b> exists on a specific system, it would likely be a custom script, an alias, or a component of a specialized software package not typically included by default. As such, its functionality, syntax, and options would be entirely dependent on its particular implementation on that system. Users encountering this command should verify its source or consult local documentation for specific usage details.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>filen</b> command is not a part of the standard GNU/Linux utility set. Its presence and behavior would be entirely dependent on custom installations or specific software environments. Relying on <b>filen</b> for general Linux tasks is not recommended, as it lacks portability and universal documentation.


title: VERIFYING COMMAND EXISTENCE
content:
To determine if <b>filen</b> is available on your system, you can use commands like <i>type filen</i>, <i>which filen</i>, or <i>man filen</i>.<br>If these commands return 'not found' or similar messages, it confirms that <b>filen</b> is not a standard installed utility.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is no documented history for a standard, widely adopted <b>filen</b> command within the mainstream development of Linux or Unix-like operating systems. Its usage or development history would be limited to specific, possibly private, custom scripts or niche applications.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Enter interactive mode</b>`filen`<br><b>Upload a local file to a specific remote folder</b>`filen upload [path/to/local_file] [remote_folder_id]`<br><b>Download a file or folder using its remote ID</b>`filen download [remote_id] [path/to/local_destination]`<br><b>List files and folders inside a remote folder</b>`filen ls [remote_folder]`<br><b>Delete a remote file or folder (move it to trash)</b>`filen rm [remote_id]`<br><b>Restore a trashed item</b>`filen trash restore [remote_id]`<br><b>Synchronize a local folder with a remote folder (two-way sync)</b>`filen sync [path/to/local_folder]:/[remote_folder] --continuous`<br><b>Download changes from the cloud to a local folder (one-way sync)</b>`filen sync [path/to/local_folder]:ctl:/[remote_folder]`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ndc</b> [<b>-c</b> <i>config-file</i>] [<b>-p</b> <i>port</i>] [<b>-s</b> <i>socket-path</i>] [<b>-t</b> <i>chroot-dir</i>] [<b>-l</b> <i>local-addr</i>] <i>command</i> [<i>arguments</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-c</b> <i>config-file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the <b>ndc</b> configuration file.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>port</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the TCP port on which the <b>named</b> daemon is listening for control commands (default often 953, but could vary in older setups).<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>socket-path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the Unix domain socket for controlling <b>named</b> (e.g., <i>/var/run/ndc</i>). This was a common and often preferred local control method.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>chroot-dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a chroot directory for <b>ndc</b>. Useful when <b>named</b> itself is running in a chrooted environment.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>local-addr</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the local IP address for outgoing TCP connections to <b>named</b>.<br><br><b><i>command</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The action to perform on the <b>named</b> daemon. Common commands include:<br><b>dumpdb</b>: Dumps the in-memory DNS cache to a file.<br><b>halt</b>: Stops DNS services but keeps the daemon process running.<br><b>notrace</b>: Turns off debugging tracing.<br><b>querylog</b>: Turns on query logging.<br><b>noquerylog</b>: Turns off query logging.<br><b>reconfig</b>: Reloads <b>named.conf</b> but not zone data.<br><b>reload</b>: Reloads <b>named.conf</b> and all zone data.<br><b>restart</b>: Restarts the <b>named</b> daemon process.<br><b>stats</b>: Dumps statistics to a file.<br><b>status</b>: Prints a summary of <b>named</b>'s status.<br><b>stop</b>: Stops the <b>named</b> daemon process.<br><b>trace</b> [<i>level</i>]: Sets debugging tracing level.<br><b>version</b>: Prints the version of <b>named</b>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ndc</i>, the Name Domain Control utility, was a command-line tool used to administer and control the <b>named</b> daemon, the primary component of the BIND (Berkeley Internet Name Domain) DNS server software, specifically in older versions like BIND 8. It allowed administrators to send commands to a running <b>named</b> instance, such as reloading configuration files, dumping DNS cache, or managing debugging levels. Commands were typically sent over a Unix domain socket or a TCP connection.<br><br>While instrumental in its time for managing DNS infrastructure, <b>ndc</b> is now considered deprecated. It lacked robust authentication mechanisms, making it less secure for modern deployments. Its functionality has been largely superseded by <b>rndc</b> (Remote Name Domain Control) which was introduced with BIND 9, offering cryptographically authenticated control and enhanced capabilities for remote administration.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>ndc</b> is largely obsolete and should not be used in modern BIND deployments. It lacks built-in authentication mechanisms, making it inherently insecure for remote control and vulnerable to unauthorized access if not properly secured via firewall rules or Unix socket permissions. Its functionality has been completely replaced by <b>rndc</b>, which offers robust TSIG-authenticated communication.


title: COMMUNICATION METHOD
content:
<b>ndc</b> communicates with the <b>named</b> daemon either via a local Unix domain socket (preferable for security on the same host) or over a TCP/IP network connection. The specific port for TCP/IP communication was configurable and sometimes shared with DNS query port 53 in very old configurations, or used a dedicated control port like 953.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>ndc</b> was the standard control utility for the BIND DNS server in its 8.x series. It provided a simple interface for managing the <b>named</b> daemon. With the release of BIND 9, the Internet Systems Consortium (ISC) introduced <b>rndc</b> as its successor. This change was primarily driven by the need for enhanced security, as <b>rndc</b> incorporates cryptographic authentication (TSIG) for control commands, a feature critically missing in <b>ndc</b>. Consequently, <b>ndc</b> rapidly fell out of use as BIND 9 became prevalent, and it is no longer distributed with modern BIND packages.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Set the [c]ontrol channel rendezvous point</b>`ndc -c [channel] [command]`<br><b>Bind the client side to a specific [l]ocalsock address</b>`ndc -l [localsock] [command]`<br><b>Set path to [p]idfile for UNIX signal control</b>`ndc -p [path/to/pidfile] [command]`<br><b>Enable [d]ebugging</b>`ndc -d [command]`<br><b>Enable [q]uiet mode</b>`ndc -q [command]`<br><b>Enable nonfatal error [s]uppression</b>`ndc -s [command]`<br><b>Enable [t]racing for protocol and system debugging</b>`ndc -t [command]`<br><b>List built-in commands</b>`ndc /help`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<I>jj split</I> [OPTIONS] [REVISION]<br>or<br><I>jj split</I> [OPTIONS] --from <REV> --to <REV><br><br>The <I>REVISION</I> argument defaults to the current commit if not specified.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--from <REV></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the starting revision for splitting a range of commits when used with --to.<br><br><b>--to <REV></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the ending revision for splitting a range of commits when used with --from.<br><br><b>-r, --revision <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(Default: @) The commit to split. This is often the most recent commit or a specific commit ID.<br><br><b>-i, --interactive</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Launches an interactive diff editor (e.g., meld, vimdiff) to select which changes (hunks) from the chosen revision should move to the new commit.<br><br><b>-m, --message <MESSAGE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides an initial commit message for the first new commit created by the split operation, bypassing the editor.<br><br><b>-s, --tool <TOOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the diff editor to use for interactive splitting. Overrides the default configured tool.<br><br><b>--at <PATH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When specified, only changes affecting the given path(s) will be considered for splitting.<br><br><b>--edit-original</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Keeps the original commit message but allows editing the new commit's message.<br><br><b>--skip-empty</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents the creation of an empty commit if no changes are selected for one of the split parts.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>jj split</I> is a powerful subcommand within the <I>Jujutsu (jj)</I> version control system. It allows users to refactor a single commit into two or more distinct commits, or to split a range of commits. This is particularly useful for cleaning up commit history, separating logical changes, or reordering contributions. When used interactively, it presents a diff of the chosen commit, allowing the user to select which hunks or lines belong to the "original" commit and which should form the "new" commit(s). It effectively rewrites history by creating new commits based on the split content, making it a flexible alternative to operations like <I>git rebase -i</I> for detailed history manipulation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<B>History Rewriting:</B><br>Like many <I>jj</I> commands, <I>jj split</I> rewrites history. New commit IDs are generated, and the original commit becomes obsolete. This can affect collaborators if the changes have already been pushed.<br><B>Interactive Nature:</B><br>The <I>--interactive</I> flag relies on an external diff editor being properly configured. If no editor is configured or available, the command may fail or behave unexpectedly.<br><B>Complexity:</B><br>Splitting commits, especially interactively, requires careful attention to ensure changes are correctly allocated to the desired commits.


title: INTERACTIVE WORKFLOW
content:
When <I>jj split -i</I> is used, <I>Jujutsu</I> invokes your configured diff editor (e.g., <I>meld</I>). The editor will display the changes of the chosen commit. You typically mark which hunks or lines should remain in the "original" commit and which should be moved to the "new" commit. The editor's exit status and temporary files determine how the split is performed. After the editor closes, <I>jj</I> creates the new commit(s) and prompts for their messages if not provided via <I>--message</I>.


title: COMPARISON WITH GIT
content:
While <I>jj split</I> achieves similar results to <I>git rebase -i</I> operations (like <I>edit</I> followed by <I>git add -p</I> and <I>git commit</I>), it is often perceived as more straightforward and less error-prone within the <I>Jujutsu</I> ecosystem due to its explicit design for this specific task and integrated interactive tooling.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>jj split</I> is an integral part of the <I>Jujutsu (jj)</I> version control system, which was developed by Martin Fowler and others at Google. <I>Jujutsu</I> aims to provide a more intuitive and powerful way to manage version control compared to Git, particularly excelling in local history manipulation. The <I>split</I> command was designed from the ground up to offer a flexible and interactive method for refining commit granularity, addressing common challenges faced by developers in maintaining clean and logical commit histories. Its functionality often replaces more complex Git workflows involving interactive rebasing.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Split the given revision into two interactively, putting the second revision on top of it</b>`jj split [[-r|--revision]] [revision]`<br><b>Split out matching files from the given revision</b>`jj split [[-r|--revision]] [revision] [fileset]`<br><b>Split the given revision, putting the second revision on top of given destination(s)</b>`jj split [[-r|--revision]] [revision] [[-d|--destination]] [revset]`<br><b>Split the given revision, putting the second revision before and/or after other revision(s)</b>`jj split [[-r|--revision]] [revision] [[-B|--insert-before]] [revset] [[-A|--insert-after]] [revset]`<br><b>Split the given revision into two parallel revisions</b>`jj split [[-r|--revision]] [revision] [[-p|--parallel]]`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>jj diff [OPTIONS] [<REVISION>] [<REVISION>]<br>jj diff [OPTIONS] --from <REVISION> [--to <REVISION>]<br>jj diff [OPTIONS] --tool <TOOL> [...]</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>[<REVISION>] [<REVISION>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specifies one or two revisions to compare. If one is given, it compares that revision against its parent. If two are given, it compares the first against the second. Defaults to comparing the working-copy commit against its parent.</i><br><br><b>--from <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specifies the 'before' revision for the comparison.</i><br><br><b>--to <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specifies the 'after' revision for the comparison.</i><br><br><b>--tool <TOOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Invokes an external diff tool (e.g., `meld`, `vscode`). Tools must be configured.</i><br><br><b>--stat</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows only a diffstat, summarizing the number of lines added/deleted per file.</i><br><br><b>--summary</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows a concise summary of file changes (added, deleted, modified).</i><br><br><b>--patch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Displays the full patch output (this is the default behavior).</i><br><br><b>--no-patch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Suppresses the full patch output, often used with `--stat` or `--summary`.</i><br><br><b>--name-only</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Lists only the names of the files that have changed.</i><br><br><b>--types</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows changes in file types (e.g., regular file to symlink).</i><br><br><b>--reverse</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Swaps the 'from' and 'to' revisions, effectively showing the diff in reverse.</i><br><br><b>--conflicts</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows only unresolved conflicts in the working copy or specified revision.</i><br><br><b>--exit-code</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Exits with status 1 if differences are found, 0 otherwise. Useful for scripting.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>`jj diff` displays the differences between two revisions, or between a revision and the working copy, within the <br>Jujutsu (jj) version control system. By default, it shows the changes between the current working-copy commit and its parent, making it ideal for reviewing uncommitted work. This command is a core utility designed to provide a more flexible and user-friendly diff experience compared to traditional VCS tools. It can highlight changes made in a specific commit, show uncommitted changes in the working directory, or compare any two specified revisions. `jj diff` also supports integration with external diff viewers, allowing users to leverage their preferred visual diff tools. It's particularly useful for reviewing your work before committing, understanding the impact of a rebase, or inspecting the history of changes, operating seamlessly with Jujutsu's unique graph-based revision model.</i>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>`jj-diff` operates within the Jujutsu (jj) version control system and requires it to be installed. Its underlying data model differs significantly from Git; for instance, the concept of a 'staging area' (or index) does not exist in `jj`. Consequently, `jj-diff` behaves differently from `git diff`, particularly when dealing with uncommitted changes, as it directly compares the working copy. Users transitioning from Git should be aware of these conceptual differences and Jujutsu's unique revision syntax.</i>


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR
content:
<i>When invoked without any arguments (e.g., `jj diff`), the command defaults to showing the changes between your current working-copy commit and its parent. This is highly useful for quickly reviewing your uncommitted work.</i>


title: EXTERNAL DIFF TOOL INTEGRATION
content:
<i>`jj diff` can be configured to open differences in a variety of external diff tools like `meld`, `vscode`, `kdiff3`, etc. This is managed via the `jj config` command, allowing users to leverage their preferred visual diffing applications for a more interactive review experience. The `--tool` option explicitly invokes a named tool.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>`jj-diff` is an intrinsic command of the Jujutsu (jj) version control system, which was initiated by Martin von Loewis in the early 2020s. Jujutsu aims to be a modern, user-friendly, and powerful alternative to existing version control systems like Git, addressing common pain points with a focus on a more coherent data model and command set. `jj-diff` was designed from the outset to seamlessly integrate with `jj`'s unique concepts, such as the explicit 'working copy commit' and mutable portions of history, providing a more intuitive and consistent way to view changes compared to traditional VCS diff tools. Its evolution is tied directly to the ongoing development of the `jj` project itself, continuously enhancing its capabilities and external tool integrations.</i>


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Show changes of current revision</b>`jj diff`<br><b>Show changes of given revsets (e.g. B::D, A..D, B|C|D, etc.)</b>`jj diff [[-r|--revisions]] [revsets]`<br><b>Show changes from given revision to given revision</b>`jj diff [[-f|--from]] [from_revset] [[-t|--to]] [to_revset]`<br><b>Show diff statistics</b>`jj diff --stat`<br><b>Show a Git-format diff</b>`jj diff --git`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>gdm-binary</i> <br>This executable is typically launched automatically by the system's init process (e.g., <i>systemd</i>) when the graphical target is reached, and is <b>not intended for direct user invocation</b> with command-line options.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>gdm-binary</i> is the actual executable daemon that powers the <b>GNOME Display Manager (GDM)</b>. <br>GDM is responsible for providing the graphical login screen (often called the 'greeter'), allowing users to log in, select their preferred desktop environment (such as GNOME, Xfce, or KDE), and manage user sessions. <br>It typically starts automatically at boot time, primarily managed by <i>systemd</i> or a similar init system, and runs as a background service. <br>Users rarely, if ever, interact with <i>gdm-binary</i> directly, as its behavior and appearance are configured through specific system-wide configuration files rather than command-line arguments. <br>As a core component of the graphical environment, <i>gdm-binary</i> manages display servers (like X.Org or Wayland), handles multiple concurrent user sessions, and ensures a smooth transition from the login prompt to the user's desktop.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <i>gdm-binary</i> executable is <b>not intended for direct user execution</b>. <br>It is an internal system component typically launched and managed by the system's init process (e.g., <i>systemd</i>). <br>Attempting to run it manually can lead to conflicts with the active display manager, display issues, or system instability. <br>Configuration of GDM's behavior and appearance is primarily achieved by editing its dedicated configuration files (e.g., <i>/etc/gdm3/custom.conf</i>), not through command-line parameters to <i>gdm-binary</i> itself.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
The behavior and appearance of GDM are controlled by configuration files, most notably: <br><i><b>/etc/gdm3/custom.conf</b></i> or <i><b>/etc/gdm/custom.conf</b></i>: This is the primary user-editable configuration file for customizing GDM's behavior, such as default sessions, automatic login, and Xserver settings. <br><i><b>/usr/share/gdm/gdm.schemas</b></i> (or similar path): Contains default GDM settings and schemas. <br>Changes to these files often require a restart of the GDM service (e.g., <i>systemctl restart gdm</i>) for them to take effect.


title: ROLE IN SYSTEM STARTUP
content:
During the boot process, after the kernel and initial system services have started, the <i>systemd</i> service for GDM (typically <i>gdm.service</i>) is invoked. <br>This service then launches the <i>gdm-binary</i> executable, which initializes the graphical display, starts the greeter, and waits for user input. <br>Once a user successfully logs in, <i>gdm-binary</i> takes responsibility for starting their selected desktop environment session.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>GDM</b>, and consequently <i>gdm-binary</i>, has served as the default display manager for the GNOME desktop environment since its early versions. <br>It was developed to replace older display managers like <i>xdm</i>, aiming to offer a more integrated and user-friendly experience for GNOME users. <br>Over the years, its development has mirrored the evolution of the Linux desktop, adapting from primarily managing X11 sessions to incorporating full support for Wayland, and continually improving its security and session management capabilities.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Connect to a PostgreSQL database using a connection string</b>`pgcli postgresql://[user]@[host]/[database]`<br><b>Connect to a database using flags</b>`pgcli [[-h|--host]] [host] [[-U|--username]] [username] [[-d|--dbname]] [database]`<br><b>Display help</b>`pgcli --help`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>REV</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more revisions whose changes should be reverted. If omitted, the command defaults to reverting the changes introduced by the current working copy's parent commit.<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--message</b> <<i>MESSAGE</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the provided string as the commit message for the new revert commit, bypassing the default editor.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--revision</b> <<i>REVISION</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the revision to operate on. This can be used to select a single commit to revert or as context for other operations.<br><br><b><b>--tool</b> <<i>TOOL</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Determines the external tool to use for resolving conflicts that may arise during the revert operation.<br><br><b><b>--from</b> <<i>FROM_REV</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When reverting a range of commits, specifies the starting revision (inclusive) from which to revert changes.<br><br><b><b>--to</b> <<i>TO_REV</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When reverting a range of commits, specifies the ending revision (inclusive) up to which to revert changes.<br><br><b><b>--author</b> <<i>AUTHOR</i>></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the author for the new revert commit, overriding the default configured author.<br><br><b><b>--allow-backwards</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows reverting a range of changes where the <i>--from</i> revision is a descendant of the <i>--to</i> revision. Normally, <i>--from</i> is expected to be an ancestor.<br><br><b><b>--edit</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens an editor to allow modification of the commit message for the new revert commit.<br><br><b><b>--no-edit</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents an editor from opening for the commit message, using the default or a message provided via <b>--message</b>.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of the command's output, showing more details about the operation.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses most of the command's output, running silently.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>jj revert</i> command is used to undo changes introduced by one or more specific commits by creating a brand new commit. Unlike operations that rewrite history, <i>jj revert</i> applies the inverse of the original changes, effectively cancelling them out, and then records these inverse changes in a new commit. This approach preserves the original history, making it a safe and auditable method for undoing past modifications, especially in collaborative environments.<br><br>If the reversion process results in conflicts (e.g., if lines modified by the original commit were also changed by subsequent commits), <i>jj revert</i> will mark these conflicts in your working copy, requiring manual resolution before the new revert commit can be finalized. By default, if no specific revisions are provided, it reverts the changes introduced by the working copy's parent commit.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <i>jj revert</i> command creates a new commit; it does <b>not</b> alter or delete existing history. If conflicts occur during the revert process, they are marked in your working copy and require manual resolution before the new revert commit can be finalized. It's generally advisable to have a clean working copy before performing a revert to avoid unintended interactions with uncommitted changes.


title: CONFLICT RESOLUTION
content:
Should <i>jj revert</i> encounter any merge conflicts while applying inverse changes, it will pause the operation, mark the conflicts in your working copy (e.g., using conflict markers), and prompt you to resolve them. You can use <i>jj resolve</i> or other merge tools to fix these conflicts before continuing and finalizing the revert commit.


title: REVERTING MULTIPLE COMMITS AND RANGES
content:
<i>jj revert</i> is capable of reverting changes from multiple distinct commits by listing them as separate <i>REV</i> arguments. It can also revert a continuous range of commits by using the <b>--from</b> and <b>--to</b> options, which is useful for undoing a sequence of related changes efficiently.


title: HISTORY
content:
Jujutsu (<i>jj</i>) is a relatively new, experimental distributed version control system, developed with the goal of providing a simpler and more powerful alternative to Git. Initiated around 2022, <i>jj</i> aims for a cleaner mental model and robust support for manipulating history. The <i>revert</i> command is a foundational feature, present from early development stages, embodying <i>jj</i>'s commitment to providing safe and explicit ways to manage project history without destructive operations.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Apply the reverse of the revisions specified by the given revsets (e.g. B::D, A..D, B|C|D, etc.)</b>`jj revert [[-r|--revisions]] [revsets]`<br><b>Apply the reverse on top of specified revisions</b>`jj revert [[-r|--revisions]] [revsets] [[-d|--destination]] [revsets]`<br><b>Apply the reverse before and/or after specified revisions</b>`jj revert [[-r|--revisions]] [revsets] [[-B|--insert-before]] [revsets] [[-A|--insert-after]] [revsets]`


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Debug a DNS pathway for a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN)</b>`dnswalk [domain].`<br><b>Process sub-domains [r]ecursively</b>`dnswalk -r [domain].`<br><b>Only perform a dnswalk if the zone has been [m]odified since the last run</b>`dnswalk -m [domain].`<br><b>Print [d]ebugging and status information to stderr instead of stdout</b>`dnswalk -d [domain].`<br><b>Suppress the check for [i]nvalid characters in the domain name</b>`dnswalk -i [domain].`<br><b>Enable duplicate A record warnings</b>`dnswalk -a [domain].`<br><b>Enable "[F]ascist checking" to compare the A record PTR name with the forward name and report mismatches</b>`dnswalk -F [domain].`<br><b>Enable "[l]ame delegation" to test whether the listed host is returning authoritative answers</b>`dnswalk -l [domain].`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--tool</b> <i>&lt;NAME&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an external merge tool to use for interactive conflict resolution. Examples include <i>kdiff3</i>, <i>meld</i>, or <i>vimdiff</i>. This overrides the default tool configured in <b>jj</b>'s settings (e.g., <i>ui.merge-tool</i>).<br><br><b><b>--edit</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the invocation of the configured merge tool for all non-trivial conflicts, even if a default resolution (e.g., all changes from one side) could have been applied automatically. This ensures an interactive review of all conflicting sections.<br><br><b><b>--revert</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverts a previous resolution, marking the specified conflicts as unresolved again. This is useful if a resolution was incorrect or needs to be redone.<br><br><b><b>--dry-run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a simulation of the resolution process without making any actual changes to the repository. It reports what actions would be taken, which is useful for previewing outcomes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>jj-resolve</b> command is an integral part of the Jujutsu (jj) version control system, designed to handle conflicts that arise during operations like merging or rebasing. When <b>jj</b> encounters divergent changes that cannot be automatically reconciled, it creates a conflict, and <b>jj-resolve</b> is used to guide the resolution process.<br><br>By default, if no specific revision (<b>REV</b>) is provided, <b>jj-resolve</b> operates on the conflicts present in the current working-copy commit. This command updates the content of the affected commit(s) with the resolved version. Once a conflict is successfully resolved, <b>jj-resolve</b> marks it as such within the commit graph, indicating that the conflict no longer exists for that specific commit.<br><br>Users can interactively resolve conflicts by invoking an external merge tool, which can be configured via <b>jj</b>'s settings. The command also provides options to force the use of a merge tool even for trivial conflicts, or to revert a previous resolution, effectively re-introducing the conflict state. The status of conflicts can always be checked using the <b>jj-status</b> command.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>jj-resolve</b> fundamentally relies on the presence of conflicts. If no conflicts exist in the specified or implied commits, the command will indicate that there's nothing to resolve. For interactive resolution, a properly configured external merge tool is essential; an unconfigured or improperly working tool will prevent interactive resolution. This command resolves conflicts at the commit level, updating the content, but does not alter the commit history or create new commits automatically.


title: TYPICAL WORKFLOW
content:
A common workflow involving <b>jj-resolve</b> starts after an operation like <b>jj-merge</b> or <b>jj-rebase</b> introduces conflicts. The user would first run <b>jj-status</b> to identify unresolved conflicts. Then, <b>jj-resolve</b> is used, often with an interactive tool, to fix the conflicting sections. After resolution, <b>jj-status</b> can be re-run to confirm that the conflicts are gone and the commit is clean.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>jj-resolve</b> command is a core component of Jujutsu (<b>jj</b>), a modern, user-friendly version control system designed to address some of the complexities and limitations of traditional VCS like Git. It was developed as part of the initial design of <b>jj</b> to provide a robust and intuitive way to manage and resolve conflicts that arise naturally in collaborative development workflows, leveraging <b>jj</b>'s unique approach to commit immutability and rebasability.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Resolve all conflicts</b>`jj resolve`<br><b>List all conflicts</b>`jj resolve [[-l|--list]]`<br><b>Resolve conflicts in a given revision</b>`jj resolve [[-r|--revision]] [revset]`<br><b>Resolve conflicts in given files</b>`jj resolve [file1 file2 ...]`<br><b>Resolve accepting the incoming versions</b>`jj resolve --tool :theirs`<br><b>Resolve accepting the outgoing versions</b>`jj resolve --tool :ours`


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Create a new repository interactively</b>`gh repo [[new|create]]`<br><b>Create a private repository from the current directory</b>`gh repo [[new|create]] [[-s|--source]] . --private`<br><b>Create a public repository from the current directory</b>`gh repo [[new|create]] [[-s|--source]] . --public`<br><b>Create a public repository with a specified name and description</b>`gh repo [[new|create]] [repo_name] [[-d|--description]] "[repo_description]" --public`<br><b>Clone the new repository locally after creation</b>`gh repo [[new|create]] [repo_name] [[-c|--clone]] [--public|--private|--internal]`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-r</b>, <b>--recv</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Receive data from the device during the data-in phase.</i><br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--send</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Send data to the device during the data-out phase.</i><br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--input</b>=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Read data for send operations from the specified FILE or standard input.</i><br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--nodata</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Indicates that there is no data-in or data-out phase for the command.</i><br><br><b><b>-X</b>, <b>--xferlen</b>=<I>LEN</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify the expected transfer length in bytes for data-in/out phases.</i><br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--timeout</b>=<I>SECS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Set the command timeout in seconds (default is 60 seconds).</i><br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Increase the verbosity of output.</i><br><br><b><b>-x</b>, <b>--six</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Assume the CDB is 6 bytes long.</i><br><br><b><b>-y</b>, <b>--ten</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Assume the CDB is 10 bytes long.</i><br><br><b><b>-z</b>, <b>--sixteen</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Assume the CDB is 16 bytes long.</i><br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--data</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Print data received from the device in both hexadecimal and ASCII formats.</i><br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--error</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Print the sense buffer in hexadecimal format after the command completes.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>sg_raw</b> is a utility from the <b>sg3_utils</b> package that allows users to send arbitrary SCSI commands directly to a device. It constructs a SCSI Command Descriptor Block (CDB) from hexadecimal bytes provided on the command line or from a file. This command is invaluable for low-level diagnostics, testing device firmware, accessing vendor-specific features not exposed by standard drivers, or recovering data in unusual scenarios.<br><br>It operates directly with the SCSI Generic (sg) driver in the Linux kernel, bypassing higher-level file system or block device layers. Users must have a good understanding of SCSI commands and their specific opcode, service action, and parameter fields to use <b>sg_raw</b> effectively. Incorrect usage can lead to data corruption or device damage.</i>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>sg_raw</b> operates at a very low level and bypasses many safety mechanisms provided by higher-level drivers. Incorrectly crafted SCSI commands can lead to irreversible data loss, device corruption, or even physical damage. Users must have a deep understanding of the SCSI command set (e.g., SAM, SBC, SPC standards) relevant to their specific device. Use with extreme caution, ideally on non-production systems or with up-to-date backups. Root privileges are usually required to access <b>/dev/sg*</b> devices directly.</i>


title: <B>SCSI COMMAND DESCRIPTOR BLOCK (CDB)</B>
content:
<i>The core of <b>sg_raw</b>'s functionality revolves around the SCSI CDB. This is an array of bytes that specifies the SCSI command opcode, command-specific parameters, and control bits. Different SCSI commands have varying CDB lengths (e.g., 6, 10, 12, 16, 32 bytes). Users provide these bytes in hexadecimal format, which <b>sg_raw</b> then transmits directly to the device.</i>


title: <B>SCSI GENERIC (SG) DRIVER</B>
content:
<i><b>sg_raw</b> utilizes the Linux kernel's SCSI Generic driver, typically accessed through device nodes like <b>/dev/sg0</b>, <b>/dev/sg1</b>, etc. This driver provides a low-level interface that allows applications to send SCSI commands directly to devices without interference from higher-level block or filesystem drivers. This direct access is what enables <b>sg_raw</b>'s powerful and precise control over SCSI devices, essential for deep diagnostics and custom command execution.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><b>sg_raw</b> is a foundational component of the <b>sg3_utils</b> package, a collection of Linux utilities designed for sending SCSI commands. These tools leverage the SCSI Generic (sg) driver in the Linux kernel, which provides a direct pass-through interface for SCSI commands. The <b>sg3_utils</b> package has been developed and maintained over many years, continuously evolving to support newer SCSI standards and kernel interfaces. <b>sg_raw</b> was specifically designed to provide a flexible way to send *any* arbitrary SCSI CDB, making it an indispensable tool for advanced users, developers, and testers who require precise, granular control over SCSI devices.</i>


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Send a command to an optical SCSI device assigned to sr0 to load the media in its tray</b>`sg_raw /dev/sr0 EA 00 00 00 00 01`<br><b>Read data from IFILE instead of stdin</b>`sg_raw [[-i|--infile]] [path/to/IFILE] [/dev/sgX] [SCSI_command]`<br><b>Skip the first LEN bytes of input data</b>`sg_raw [[-k|--skip]] [LEN] [/dev/sgX] [SCSI_command]`<br><b>Read SLEN bytes of data and send to the device</b>`sg_raw [[-s|--send]] [SLEN] [/dev/sgX] [SCSI_command]`<br><b>Wait up to SEC seconds for sg_raw to finish processing</b>`sg_raw [[-t|--timeout]] [SEC] [/dev/sgX] [SCSI_command]`<br><b>Increase verbosity level by 1</b>`sg_raw [[-v|--verbose]] [/dev/sgX] [SCSI_command]`<br><b>Dump returned data in binary form</b>`sg_raw [[-b|--binary]] [/dev/sgX] [SCSI_command]`<br><b>Write data received from the specified device to an OFILE</b>`sg_raw [[-o|--outfile]] [path/to/OFILE] [/dev/sgX] [SCSI_command]`


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Start nagios</b>`nagios /etc/nagios/nagios.cfg`<br><b>Start nagios in daemon mode</b>`nagios -d`<br><b>Start nagios, print service check scheduling information to stdout, then shutdown</b>`nagios -s`<br><b>Verify configuration file</b>`nagios -v`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-M, --module &lt;path&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads the specified PKCS#11 shared library file (e.g., <I>/usr/lib/opensc-pkcs11.so</I>).<br><br><b>-P, --pin &lt;PIN&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the user PIN for authentication or cryptographic operations.<br><br><b>-s, --slot &lt;num&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the PKCS#11 slot by its numerical ID.<br><br><b>--list-slots</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays all available PKCS#11 slots and their detailed information.<br><br><b>--list-tokens</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all cryptographic tokens found within the available slots.<br><br><b>--list-objects</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enumerates all cryptographic objects (keys, certificates, data) on the currently logged-in token.<br><br><b>--login</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Establishes a user session on the token, typically requiring the <B>--pin</B> option.<br><br><b>--logout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Terminates the active user session on the token.<br><br><b>--init-token</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initializes a new PKCS#11 token, setting its label and Security Officer (SO) PIN. Requires <B>--label</B> and <B>--so-pin</B>.<br><br><b>--init-pin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initializes the user PIN for an already initialized token. Requires <B>--so-pin</B> and <B>--new-pin</B>.<br><br><b>--change-pin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Changes the user PIN of the logged-in token. Requires the current <B>--pin</B> and <B>--new-pin</B>.<br><br><b>--gen-keypair</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates a new cryptographic key pair (e.g., RSA, EC) on the token. Requires <B>--key-type</B> and <B>--bits</B>.<br><br><b>--key-type &lt;type&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the type of key to generate, such as <I>RSA</I> or <I>EC</I>.<br><br><b>--bits &lt;num&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the key size in bits for generated keys (e.g., <I>2048</I> for RSA).<br><br><b>--label &lt;label&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assigns a human-readable label to an object during creation or identifies an existing object.<br><br><b>--id &lt;hex_id&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assigns a unique hexadecimal ID to an object or identifies an existing object by its ID.<br><br><b>--delete-object</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes a specific object from the token, identified by <B>--id</B> or <B>--label</B>.<br><br><b>--read-object</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads the content of an object from the token. Requires <B>--id</B> or <B>--label</B>.<br><br><b>--write-object &lt;file&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes data from a specified file as a new object onto the token.<br><br><b>--test</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes a built-in self-test of the token's cryptographic capabilities.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>pkcs11-tool</I> is a powerful command-line utility for interacting with PKCS#11 compliant cryptographic tokens, such as smart cards and Hardware Security Modules (HSMs).<br><br>It provides comprehensive functionalities to manage cryptographic objects like keys and certificates, and to perform various security operations. Users can list available PKCS#11 slots and tokens, initialize tokens and PINs, generate key pairs (e.g., RSA, EC), import and export objects, and change user/SO PINs.<br><br>The tool also supports cryptographic operations such as signing, verification, encryption, and decryption, making it indispensable for testing PKCS#11 drivers, automating key management tasks, and diagnosing issues with secure hardware. It is part of the <I>OpenSC</I> project, widely used in environments requiring strong authentication and secure key storage.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <I>pkcs11-tool</I> requires careful handling of sensitive information like PINs and private keys.<br><br>Incorrect usage, especially with commands like <B>--init-token</B> or <B>--delete-object</B>, can lead to permanent data loss or render the token unusable.<br><br>The exact behavior and supported mechanisms can vary significantly between different PKCS#11 modules and hardware tokens.


title: UNDERSTANDING PKCS#11
content:
PKCS#11 (Cryptoki) is a standard API for cryptographic tokens, defining how applications can interact with cryptographic devices like smart cards or HSMs. <I>pkcs11-tool</I> provides a direct command-line interface to this API, enabling low-level management and operations without custom programming.


title: MODULE LIBRARY PATH
content:
To use <I>pkcs11-tool</I>, you must specify the path to the PKCS#11 shared library (.so file) of your token using the <B>--module</B> option. Common paths include <I>/usr/lib/opensc-pkcs11.so</I>, <I>/usr/lib/softhsm/libsofthsm2.so</I>, or vendor-specific library paths provided by your hardware vendor.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>pkcs11-tool</I> is a core component of the <I>OpenSC</I> project, an open-source initiative dedicated to providing secure smart card and PKCS#11 support on Linux and other Unix-like operating systems.<br><br>Its development began in the early 2000s, aligning with the growing demand for standardized interfaces to cryptographic hardware. Over the years, it has evolved to support various PKCS#11 versions and a wide range of hardware security modules and smart cards, establishing itself as a de-facto standard command-line utility for PKCS#11 interaction in the open-source ecosystem.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>List slots and their potential token, using a specific module (e.g. /usr/lib/softhsm/libsofthsm2.so)</b>`pkcs11-tool --module [path/to/module.so] [[-L|--list-slots]] [[-T|--list-token-slots]]`<br><b>List objects in a specific slot. (Note: slot_id is not the slot index shown as "Slot X")</b>`pkcs11-tool [[-O|--list-objects]] [[-p|--pin]] [auth_pin] --slot [slot_id]`<br><b>Create a new object with a specific label and type</b>`pkcs11-tool --slot [slot_id] [[-p|--pin]] [auth_pin] [[-y|--type]] [cert|privkey|pubkey|secrkey|data|...] [[-a|--label]] "[label]" [[-d|--id]] [01] [[-w|--write-object]] [path/to/cert.crt]`<br><b>Delete an object by its label and type</b>`pkcs11-tool --slot [slot_id] [[-p|--pin]] [auth_pin] [[-y|--type]] [cert|privkey|pubkey|secrkey|data|...] [[-a|--label]] "[label]" [[-b|--delete-object]]`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Displays a brief help message explaining command usage and available options.</i><br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows the version information for the gdmsetup utility.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>gdmsetup</i> was a graphical utility primarily used in older versions of the GNOME Display Manager (GDM) to configure its various settings. It provided an intuitive user interface for administrators to manage aspects like the login screen appearance (themes, backgrounds), security options (automatic login, timed login), remote login capabilities via XDMCP, and session management.<br><br>Users could enable or disable specific features, change default sessions, and customize the overall login experience without directly editing complex configuration files. While convenient for its time, <i>gdmsetup</i> has largely been superseded in modern Linux distributions. Current GDM configurations are typically managed through direct modifications to configuration files in directories such as <i>/etc/gdm3/</i> or <i>/etc/gdm/</i> (e.g., <i>custom.conf</i>), or via graphical interfaces within the <i>gnome-control-center</i>. As a result, <i>gdmsetup</i> is often no longer available or functional in contemporary systems, reflecting the evolution of GDM's architecture.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>gdmsetup</i> is largely <b>deprecated</b> and <b>no longer included</b> or functional in many modern Linux distributions and GDM versions. Its functionality has been replaced by direct configuration file editing (e.g., <i>/etc/gdm3/custom.conf</i>) and graphical tools like <i>gnome-control-center</i>. It requires a graphical environment to run. Attempting to run it on a modern system may result in a 'command not found' error or unexpected behavior.


title: <B>MODERN CONFIGURATION ALTERNATIVES</B>
content:
<i>In contemporary Linux environments running GDM (e.g., GDM3), configuration is primarily performed by editing files like <b>/etc/gdm3/custom.conf</b> for various settings, including themes, automatic login, and default sessions. Additionally, user-specific login settings can often be managed through the 'Users' or 'Login Screen' sections within the <b>gnome-control-center</b> application.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>gdmsetup</i> utility was an integral part of the GNOME Display Manager's configuration suite during earlier versions of GNOME. It was designed to provide a user-friendly graphical interface for system administrators and users to customize the GDM login screen and session behavior without requiring manual editing of configuration files.<br><br>As the Linux ecosystem evolved, particularly with the adoption of <i>systemd</i> and <i>dconf</i> for system-wide configuration, GDM's architecture also changed. The direct configuration file approach became more prominent, and graphical configuration capabilities were integrated into broader system settings panels like <i>gnome-control-center</i>. Consequently, <i>gdmsetup</i> became obsolete and was gradually removed or replaced in most distributions, reflecting a shift towards more standardized and centralized configuration management paradigms.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>&lt;NAMES&gt;...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more names of bookmarks to create, delete, or list. When creating, these are the names of the new bookmarks. When deleting, these are the names of bookmarks to remove. If no names are provided, a new bookmark is created at the current revision by default (unless <b>--list</b> is used).<br><br><b><b>--delete</b>, <b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deletes the specified bookmarks. Requires bookmark names to be provided as arguments.<br><br><b><b>--force</b>, <b>-f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows creating a bookmark that already exists (it will be moved to the new revision), or deleting a bookmark that does not exist (the command will not error out). This option overrides normal safety checks.<br><br><b><b>--name</b> <i>&lt;NAME&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly specifies the name of the bookmark to operate on. This option can be used multiple times to specify multiple names, similar to the positional arguments.<br><br><b><b>--revision</b> <i>&lt;REVISION&gt;</i>, <b>-r</b> <i>&lt;REVISION&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the revision to which the bookmark should point. If omitted when creating a bookmark, the bookmark will point to the current working copy's revision.<br><br><b><b>--message</b> <i>&lt;MESSAGE&gt;</i>, <b>-m</b> <i>&lt;MESSAGE&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attaches an optional message to the bookmark. While technically possible, this is less commonly used for bookmarks than for tags.<br><br><b><b>--list</b>, <b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all existing bookmarks in the repository. When used, any other creation or deletion arguments are ignored, and the command simply displays the list of bookmarks.<br><br><b><b>--all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used in conjunction with <b>--list</b>, this option displays all bookmarks, including those in the working copy that might not be immediately visible in the current view or filtered out by default.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>jj bookmark</b> command in the Jujutsu (jj) version control system allows users to create, delete, and list bookmarks. Bookmarks are lightweight, local pointers to specific revisions in the repository's history. Unlike branches, which are typically synchronized with remote repositories and represent shared lines of development, bookmarks are strictly local and are not automatically pushed or pulled. They serve as a convenient mechanism for marking revisions that a user might want to revisit quickly, for temporary work, or for internal navigation without the overhead of creating a full branch. By default, running <b>jj bookmark</b> creates a new bookmark pointing to the current revision. Users can specify a target revision, delete existing bookmarks, or list all active bookmarks. Their mutable nature makes them ideal for quickly marking and moving pointers as work progresses.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Jujutsu bookmarks are strictly local to your repository and are not designed for synchronization with remote repositories. They are mutable and can be easily moved or deleted, making them less suitable for marking immutable historical points (like releases) compared to 'tags'. They do not create new branches in the traditional Git sense and are purely for personal navigation and temporary markers.


title: BOOKMARKS VS. BRANCHES
content:
In Jujutsu, the primary distinction between bookmarks and branches is their scope and synchronization behavior. <i>Branches</i> are intended for shared development, can be pushed and pulled to remotes, and typically represent named lines of development. <i>Bookmarks</i>, conversely, are purely local, are not synchronized, and serve as personal, temporary pointers that are easily moved or discarded. They are often used for quick navigation or marking revisions during a feature's development cycle.


title: BOOKMARKS VS. TAGS
content:
While both bookmarks and tags point to specific revisions, their intended use differs. <i>Bookmarks</i> are mutable and designed to be moved or deleted frequently for personal workflow management. <i>Tags</i>, particularly Git tags (which Jujutsu can interact with), are generally considered immutable and are used for marking significant, permanent points in history, such as release versions. Jujutsu's native tags also share this immutability characteristic when used, though they are less frequently used than Git tags due to Jujutsu's mutable history model.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>jj-bookmark</b> command is an integral part of the Jujutsu (jj) version control system, which was developed by Martin Jambon. Jujutsu aims to offer a more intuitive and powerful alternative to Git, focusing on a mutable history model and a rebase-centric workflow. Bookmarks were introduced as a core feature to provide a lightweight, local mechanism for marking revisions, complementing <b>jj branch</b> for shared development and <b>jj tag</b> for immutable references. Its design reflects Jujutsu's philosophy of providing flexible tools for local repository manipulation and navigation.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Create a new bookmark at the given revision</b>`jj [[b|bookmark]] [[c|create]] [[-r|--revision]] [revision] [name]`<br><b>List all existing bookmarks and their targets</b>`jj [[b|bookmark]] [[l|list]]`<br><b>Move an existing bookmark to another revision</b>`jj [[b|bookmark]] [[m|move]] [[-t|--to]] [revision] [name]`<br><b>Track given remote bookmarks</b>`jj [[b|bookmark]] [[t|track]] [name]@[remote]`<br><b>Delete a bookmark, and propagate the deletion to remotes on the next push</b>`jj [[b|bookmark]] [[d|delete]] [name]`<br><b>Forget a bookmark locally, without marking its deletion to be pushed</b>`jj [[b|bookmark]] [[f|forget]] [name]`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>jj</b><br> [<i>GLOBAL_OPTIONS</i>]<br> <<i>SUBCOMMAND</i>><br> [<i>SUBCOMMAND_OPTIONS</i>]<br> [<i>ARGS...</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>init</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Initializes a new Jujutsu repository.</i><br><br><b>status</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows the current repository status and changes.</i><br><br><b>log</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Displays the commit history.</i><br><br><b>diff</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows changes between commits or the working copy.</i><br><br><b>commit</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Records changes to the repository.</i><br><br><b>branch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Manages branches in the repository.</i><br><br><b>checkout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Switches to a different commit or branch.</i><br><br><b>rebase</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Rebases a commit or set of commits onto another.</i><br><br><b>squash</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Combines the current commit with its parent.</i><br><br><b>undo</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Reverts the last operation.</i><br><br><b>push</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Updates remote Git repositories with local changes.</i><br><br><b>pull</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Fetches changes from remote Git repositories.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Jujutsu</i> (<code><b>jj</b></code>) is a modern, Git-compatible distributed version control system designed for a more intuitive and efficient developer experience. It aims to simplify complex version control operations by providing a different, often simpler, mental model than Git. Key features include a mutable history (changes are always applied as new commits, but old commits can be rewritten implicitly), a powerful operation log for easy undoing of actions, and rebase-by-default workflows. While offering a unique command-line interface, <i>Jujutsu</i> operates on standard Git repositories, ensuring full interoperability with existing Git tools and services. It prioritizes local workflow efficiency and aims to make tasks like rebasing, amending, and splitting commits more straightforward.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>Jujutsu</i> (<code><b>jj</b></code>) is <i>not</i> a standard command pre-installed on most Linux distributions; it must be installed separately. Its command structure and mental model differ significantly from Git, which can require a learning curve for experienced Git users. As a relatively new project, it is still under active development, and its API and features may evolve.


title: <B>KEY FEATURES</B>
content:
<i><br><b>Mutable History:</b> Allows seamless rewriting of past commits without explicit rebase commands.<br><b>Operation Log:</b> Provides a robust `jj undo` command to revert any previous operation.<br><b>Rebase by Default:</b> Encourages linear history by automatically rebasing local changes.<br><b>Git Compatibility:</b> Works on top of standard Git repositories, ensuring interoperability.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Jujutsu</i> (<code><b>jj</b></code>) was created by <i>Martin von Zweigbergk</i>, with its first public release and increasing adoption around <i>2021-2022</i>. It emerged from a desire to address the complexities and limitations of Git's user interface, aiming to provide a more intuitive and powerful tool for daily version control tasks. Its development focuses on a clean conceptual model and efficient local workflows.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Update description of the revisions specified by given revsets (e.g. B::D, A..D, B|C|D, etc.)</b>`jj [[desc|describe]] [[-m|--message]] "[message]" [[-r|--revision]] [revsets]`<br><b>Create a new commit/revision on top of a given revision</b>`jj new [revset]`<br><b>Create a new merge commit on top of multiple revisions</b>`jj new [revset1 revset2 ...]`<br><b>Update the working copy to point to a revision</b>`jj edit [revset]`<br><b>Undo the previous command (which may itself have been undo)</b>`jj undo`<br><b>Execute a jj subcommand without snapshotting the working copy</b>`jj --ignore-working-copy [subcommand]`<br><b>Execute a jj subcommand at an operation</b>`jj [[--at-op|--at-operation]] [operation] [subcommand]`<br><b>Display help for a specific subcommand (like new, commit, desc, etc.)</b>`jj help [subcommand]`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-n</b> <i>&lt;num&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the top <i>&lt;num&gt;</i> most frequently used commands.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>&lt;file_path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative history file to analyze instead of the default shell history.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows global statistics, such as the total number of commands executed and the count of unique commands.<br><br><b><b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Groups command usage statistics by date or day, showing trends over time.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, providing more detailed information about the analysis process.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>cmd-wrapped</b> command is a conceptual or user-defined utility designed to provide a comprehensive summary of your command-line activity, akin to popular 'Wrapped' features from music or media services. <br><br>It analyzes your shell's history file (e.g., <i>~/.bash_history</i> or <i>~/.zsh_history</i>) to extract valuable insights into your terminal usage patterns. This includes identifying your most frequently used commands, the total number of commands executed, unique commands, and potentially activity trends over time. <br><br>The purpose of <b>cmd-wrapped</b> is to offer a reflective overview of your productivity, highlight commands you might have forgotten, or simply satisfy curiosity about your own command-line habits.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The accuracy and completeness of <b>cmd-wrapped</b> depend heavily on your shell's history configuration (e.g., <i>HISTSIZE</i>, <i>HISTFILESIZE</i>, <i>HISTCONTROL</i>). Commands run without being logged to history (e.g., in sub-shells with disabled history, or with certain <i>HISTCONTROL</i> settings) will not be included. <br><br>Analyzing large history files can be resource-intensive. Be mindful of privacy, as history files can contain sensitive commands or file paths that you might not wish to share.


title: DATA SOURCES AND HISTORY MANAGEMENT
content:
<b>cmd-wrapped</b> primarily relies on your shell's history file, typically located at <i>~/.bash_history</i> for Bash or <i>~/.zsh_history</i> for Zsh. The amount of data available for analysis is governed by shell configuration variables such as <i>HISTSIZE</i> (maximum number of commands in memory), <i>HISTFILESIZE</i> (maximum number of lines in the history file), and <i>HISTCONTROL</i> (controls how commands are saved, e.g., ignoring duplicates). Proper configuration of these variables is crucial for a comprehensive 'wrapped' summary.


title: CUSTOM IMPLEMENTATIONS
content:
As <b>cmd-wrapped</b> is often a user-created or community-driven script, its functionality and output can vary widely. Users are encouraged to customize or develop their own versions using standard Linux text processing tools. This allows for tailoring the analysis to specific needs, such as filtering by date ranges, excluding certain commands, or integrating with other data visualization tools to create personalized command-line usage reports.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of <b>cmd-wrapped</b> is not tied to a single, officially standardized Linux utility. Instead, it arises from two main inspirations: the long-standing practice among power users of manually parsing their shell history files (e.g., <i>~/.bash_history</i>) to gain insights into their command usage, and the widespread popularity of 'Wrapped' annual summaries (e.g., Spotify Wrapped) that personalize data analysis.<br><br>Users have historically crafted their own shell scripts using commands like <b>grep</b>, <b>awk</b>, <b>sort</b>, and <b>uniq</b> to achieve similar results. The term 'cmd-wrapped' thus represents a modern, playful, and conceptual application of these personal data summary trends to the command-line interface, reflecting a growing interest in self-quantification within the computing environment.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Fetch current statistics</b>`cmd-wrapped`<br><b>Fetch statistics from a specific year</b>`cmd-wrapped [year]`<br><b>Specify a shell</b>`cmd-wrapped [[-s|--shell]] [shell]`<br><b>Display help</b>`cmd-wrapped [[-h|--help]]`<br><b>Display version</b>`cmd-wrapped [[-V|--version]]`


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Process JSON file into individual assignments</b>`gron [path/to/file|url]`<br><b>Don't sort output data</b>`gron --no-sort [path/to/file|url]`<br><b>Disable certificate validation</b>`gron [[-k|--insecure]] [url]`<br><b>Display values of gron assignments</b>`gron [[-v|--values]] [path/to/file|url]`<br><b>Turn assignments converted with gron back into JSON</b>`gron [[-u|--ungron]] [path/to/file|url]`<br><b>Process individual lines of input as separate JSON objects</b>`gron [[-s|--stream]] [path/to/file|url]`<br><b>Represent processed data as a JSON stream</b>`gron [[-j|--json]] [path/to/file|url]`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-b</b>, <b>--backend</b> <i>&lt;BACKEND&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the audio backend to use. Common options include <i>alsa</i>, <i>pulseaudio</i>, and <i>portaudio</i>. Defaults to <i>pulseaudio</i>.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--config</b> <i>&lt;CONFIG&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides an alternative path to the configuration file. By default, <i>ncspot</i> looks for <i>~/.config/ncspot/config.toml</i>.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available command-line options and exits.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--osc</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables Open Sound Control (OSC) for communication with external applications, useful for integration with other tools.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--session</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restores the previous playback session upon startup, picking up where you left off.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of <i>ncspot</i> and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ncspot</i> is a feature-rich, ncurses-based Spotify client for your Linux terminal, crafted with Rust. It provides a lightweight and efficient way to interact with Spotify without leaving your command line. Users can browse playlists, search for artists, albums, and tracks, manage queues, and even view lyrics directly within the terminal interface. It leverages the <i>librespot</i> library for Spotify's internal communication, ensuring a robust connection to the service. Designed for minimal resource usage, <i>ncspot</i> is an excellent choice for users who prefer keyboard-driven interfaces and want a seamless Spotify experience on remote servers, older hardware, or simply within their favorite terminal emulator. It requires a Spotify Premium account to function.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ncspot</i> requires a Spotify Premium account for full functionality. It does not support local music file playback. As a terminal UI application, it relies on keyboard shortcuts for navigation and control, which might have a slight learning curve for new users.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
<i>ncspot</i>'s behavior, keybindings, and themes can be customized via its configuration file, typically located at <i>~/.config/ncspot/config.toml</i>. This TOML-formatted file allows users to personalize nearly every aspect of the application's appearance and interaction.


title: KEYBINDINGS
content:
Navigation and control within <i>ncspot</i> are primarily done through keyboard shortcuts. Common actions include searching (<i>/</i>), playing/pausing (<i>space</i>), skipping tracks (<i>n</i>), and managing the queue (<i>q</i>). A comprehensive list of keybindings can be found within the application's help menu (<i>?</i>) or in the configuration file.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed in Rust, <i>ncspot</i> emerged as a modern terminal Spotify client, leveraging Rust's performance and safety features. It builds upon the success of other terminal-based music players and aims to provide a robust and responsive user experience for Spotify users who prefer a command-line interface.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Start ncspot</b>`ncspot`<br><b>Enable logging to the specified file</b>`ncspot [[-d|--debug]] [path/to/file]`<br><b>Display paths to the configuration and cache</b>`ncspot info`<br><b>Use a different configuration file (in the directory reported by ncspot info; default: config.toml)</b>`ncspot [[-c|--config]] [file_name]`<br><b>Display a list of keybindings</b>`<?>`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-r, --revision <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show status relative to a specific revision instead of the working-copy commit. This allows comparing the working directory against an arbitrary commit in the history.<br><br><b>-s, --summary</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display only a brief summary of the changes, omitting detailed file differences.<br><br><b>--color <WHEN></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Control when to use color in the output. <I>WHEN</I> can be 'auto' (default), 'always', or 'never'.<br><br><b>--pager <WHEN></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Control when to use a pager for the output. <I>WHEN</I> can be 'auto' (default), 'always', or 'never'.<br><br><b>--plain</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all colors and fancy formatting, producing plain text output.<br><br><b>--tool <TOOL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an external tool to use for displaying diffs or resolving conflicts. This option might influence how certain details are presented if a diff tool is integrated.<br><br><b>--width <WIDTH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the maximum width of the output in characters, affecting text wrapping and formatting.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>jj-status</i> is a fundamental command in the <I>Jujutsu (jj)</I> version control system, analogous to <I>git status</I>. It provides a comprehensive overview of the current state of your working copy relative to the current commit in the repository. This includes: <br><br><b>Uncommitted Changes:</b> Files that have been modified but not yet committed.<br><b>Staged Changes:</b> In Jujutsu, there isn't a direct concept of a 'staging area' like Git. Instead, changes are typically committed directly or iteratively built. <I>jj-status</I> focuses on the differences between the working copy and the parent commit.<br><b>Conflicts:</b> Files or directories that have merge conflicts requiring resolution.<br><b>Current Branch/Commit:</b> Information about the active commit and any associated branches or tags.<br><br>The command helps developers quickly identify what needs to be committed, what changes are in progress, and if there are any issues preventing a clean commit.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Jujutsu (<I>jj</I>) is a relatively new version control system. While <I>jj-status</I> serves a similar purpose to <I>git status</I>, its underlying data model and how it handles concepts like staging areas differ significantly. Users accustomed to Git should be aware that their workflow with <I>jj-status</I> might feel slightly different, particularly regarding how changes are considered 'staged' or 'unstaged'. <br><br>The command requires <I>Jujutsu</I> to be installed and run within a <I>jj</I> repository.


title: OUTPUT INTERPRETATION
content:
<I>jj-status</I> output typically groups changes into categories:<br><b>Modified:</b> Files that have changed.<br><b>Added:</b> New files not yet tracked.<br><b>Removed:</b> Files deleted from the working copy.<br><b>Conflicted:</b> Files with merge conflicts.<br><br>It also clearly indicates the current commit, its parent(s), and any associated branches or description. The output aims to be clear and concise, often using colors to highlight different types of changes.


title: WORKING DIRECTORY VS. WORKING COPY
content:
In <I>Jujutsu</I>, the 'working copy' refers to the set of files and directories that you are currently editing. <I>jj-status</I> compares the state of this working copy with the 'working-copy commit' (the commit that the working directory is currently based on). Any differences are reported as changes that are not yet part of a commit.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>jj-status</I> command is an integral part of the <I>Jujutsu (jj)</I> version control system, which was publicly released in 2022. <I>Jujutsu</I> was developed with the goal of providing a simpler, more powerful, and Git-compatible alternative, focusing on a more intuitive data model for commits and branches. <I>jj-status</I> was included from the initial design to offer immediate feedback on the state of the working directory, reflecting <I>Jujutsu's</I> emphasis on direct manipulation of the commit graph and efficient change tracking.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
The primary command-line executable for the Nagios 4 daemon is <b>nagios</b>. In production environments, it's typically managed by a service manager (e.g., <i>systemctl</i>).<br><br><b>nagios</b> <i>-v &lt;config_file&gt;</i><br><b>nagios</b> <i>-d &lt;config_file&gt;</i> [<i>-p &lt;pid_file&gt;</i>] [<i>-u &lt;user&gt;</i>] [<i>-g &lt;group&gt;</i>]<br><b>nagios</b> [<i>-s</i> | <i>-H</i> | <i>-V</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-v &lt;config_file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verifies the specified Nagios configuration file(s) for syntax errors and logical inconsistencies. This is a crucial step before starting or reloading the daemon.<br><br><b><i>-d &lt;config_file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the Nagios daemon in the background using the specified configuration file. This is the primary method to run Nagios as a persistent service.<br><br><b><i>-s</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a short program status summary, including the process ID and the configuration file currently in use by the daemon.<br><br><b><i>-p &lt;pid_file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternate path for the PID file when starting the daemon in background mode. Defaults to the path defined in <i>nagios.cfg</i>.<br><br><b><i>-u &lt;user&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the unprivileged user under which the Nagios daemon will run after its initial startup. This is essential for security.<br><br><b><i>-g &lt;group&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the unprivileged group under which the Nagios daemon will run after its initial startup. This is essential for security.<br><br><b><i>-V</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the Nagios version number and copyright information, then exits.<br><br><b><i>-H</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief usage summary and lists all available command-line options, then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Nagios 4 refers to the fourth major version of the Nagios Core monitoring engine, a powerful and widely adopted open-source system for IT infrastructure monitoring. It provides proactive monitoring capabilities for a wide range of components including servers, networks, applications, and services.<br><br>The system continuously executes various checks (e.g., ping, HTTP, disk space, CPU load) on specified hosts and services using a robust plugin architecture. When issues are detected, Nagios can send alerts through multiple channels, such as email, SMS, or custom handlers, facilitating rapid response to outages or performance degradation. It also offers a comprehensive web interface for viewing real-time status, historical data, and generating performance reports.<br><br>Nagios helps organizations minimize downtime, identify potential problems before they impact end-users, and ensure the continuous availability and optimal performance of critical systems. Its extensibility through thousands of community-developed plugins makes it adaptable to diverse monitoring needs.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Configuration Complexity:</b><br>Nagios relies on a large number of plain-text configuration files, which can become complex and challenging to manage in large, dynamic environments without automation tools or higher-level configuration management systems.<br><br><b>Learning Curve:</b><br>Setting up, configuring, and maintaining a Nagios installation requires a significant understanding of its architecture, configuration syntax, and the various services it monitors. The initial learning curve can be steep.<br><br><b>Plugin Dependence:</b><br>While Nagios is highly extensible, effective and specific monitoring often requires developing custom plugins or scripts, which demands scripting or programming skills.<br><br><b>Resource Usage:</b><br>For very large installations with thousands of checks, Nagios can consume substantial CPU and memory resources, necessitating careful tuning, optimization, and potentially distributed setups.<br><br><b>Daemon Management:</b><br>The <i>nagios</i> command itself is rarely used directly for starting or stopping the service in production environments; most Linux distributions manage it via service managers like <i>systemctl</i> or <i>service</i> for proper startup, shutdown, and logging.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
Nagios relies heavily on a hierarchical set of plain-text configuration files, typically found in <i>/usr/local/nagios/etc/</i> or <i>/etc/nagios/</i>, depending on the installation. The main configuration file, <i>nagios.cfg</i>, serves as the entry point and includes other files that define hosts, services, commands, contact groups, time periods, and more. Any changes to these files usually require a configuration verification (using <i>nagios -v</i>) and a service reload or restart to take effect.


title: PLUGIN ARCHITECTURE
content:
One of Nagios's most powerful features is its highly extensible plugin architecture. Plugins are external scripts or compiled binaries (which can be written in any programming language) that Nagios executes to perform specific checks (e.g., checking disk space, HTTP response times, or database connectivity). These plugins return a standardized numeric exit code (0 for OK, 1 for WARNING, 2 for CRITICAL, 3 for UNKNOWN) and output text that Nagios interprets to determine the status of a monitored object. Common plugin directories include <i>/usr/local/nagios/libexec/</i> or <i>/usr/lib/nagios/plugins/</i>.


title: WEB INTERFACE
content:
Nagios provides a comprehensive web-based user interface, typically accessed via CGI scripts served by a web server like Apache or Nginx. This interface allows users to view the current status of all monitored hosts and services, acknowledge problems, schedule planned downtime, view historical event logs, and generate various performance and availability reports. It serves as the primary visual dashboard for operational monitoring.


title: DAEMON MANAGEMENT
content:
While the <i>nagios</i> command offers direct control over the daemon, in most production Linux environments, Nagios is managed as a system service. For <i>systemd</i>-based distributions (e.g., modern CentOS/RHEL, Ubuntu), commands such as <i>systemctl start nagios.service</i>, <i>systemctl stop nagios.service</i>, <i>systemctl restart nagios.service</i>, and <i>systemctl status nagios.service</i> are used to control the Nagios daemon. For older <i>SysVinit</i>-based systems, commands like <i>service nagios start</i> or <i>/etc/init.d/nagios start</i> would be common. This method ensures proper logging, process supervision, and automatic startup at boot.


title: HISTORY
content:
Nagios originated in 1999 as a project named "NetSaint," developed by Ethan Galstad. It was renamed to "Nagios" in 2002 due to trademark issues. Nagios Core, the open-source monitoring engine, has since been the foundation, with Nagios 4 introducing various performance improvements, scalability enhancements, and architectural refinements over its predecessors.<br><br>Nagios has profoundly influenced the open-source monitoring landscape, leading to the creation of several forks and related projects, most notably Icinga and Naemon, which continue to evolve independently. Despite the emergence of newer monitoring solutions, Nagios Core remains a robust and widely utilized system in enterprise IT for its stability, flexibility, and extensive plugin ecosystem. Nagios Enterprises also developed commercial products like Nagios XI, building upon the Core engine with a more user-friendly interface and additional enterprise features.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Start nagios4</b>`nagios4 /etc/nagios4/nagios.cfg`<br><b>Start nagios4 in daemon mode</b>`nagios4 -d`<br><b>Start nagios4, print service check scheduling information to stdout, then shutdown</b>`nagios4 -s`<br><b>Verify configuration file</b>`nagios4 -v`


title: TLDR
content:
<b>List clients on the default display</b>`xlsclients`<br><b>List clients on all screens</b>`xlsclients -a`<br><b>List clients with detailed information</b>`xlsclients -l`<br><b>Limit the command output length per client to a specific number of characters</b>`xlsclients -m [max_command_length]`<br><b>Specify a particular display to inspect</b>`xlsclients -display :[display_number]`<br><b>List clients on remote host's display</b>`xlsclients -display [remote_host]:0`<br><b>Display version</b>`xlsclients -version`


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Compile an Open MPI program</b>`mpic++ [path/to/source_file]`<br><b>Show all the wrapper-supplied flags</b>`mpic++ --showme`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>APP_MODULE:APP_VARIABLE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the Python module and the ASGI application instance to run (e.g., <I>main:app</I> where <I>main.py</I> contains <I>app = FastAPI(...)</I>).<br><br><b>--host <address></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Binds the server to a specific IP address (default: <I>127.0.0.1</I>). Use <I>0.0.0.0</I> for external access.<br><br><b>--port <number></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the port to listen on (default: <I>8000</I>).<br><br><b>--reload</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables auto-reloading of the server when code changes are detected. Ideal for development.<br><br><b>--workers <number></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of worker processes to run for production (often used with Gunicorn).<br><br><b>--log-level <level></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the logging verbosity (e.g., <I>info</I>, <I>debug</I>, <I>warning</I>, <I>error</I>).<br><br><b>--proxy-headers</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables support for <I>X-Forwarded-For</I> and <I>X-Forwarded-Proto</I> headers when running behind a proxy.<br><br><b>--ssl-keyfile <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the SSL key file for HTTPS.<br><br><b>--ssl-certfile <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the SSL certificate file for HTTPS.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
While <b>fastapi</b> itself is not a standalone Linux command, it refers to the FastAPI Python web framework. To 'run' a FastAPI application on Linux, you typically use an ASGI (Asynchronous Server Gateway Interface) server. The most common and recommended server for this purpose is <I>Uvicorn</I>.<br><br>Uvicorn is a lightning-fast ASGI server built on uvloop and httptools. It enables serving asynchronous Python web applications, including those built with FastAPI, providing high performance and concurrency suitable for modern web services. When you hear 'running fastapi' on Linux, it almost invariably implies using the <I>uvicorn</I> command to serve your FastAPI application.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>FastAPI is a Python Framework, Not a Command:</I> The name 'fastapi' refers to a Python web framework, not an executable binary on Linux. The actual command used to run a FastAPI application is usually <I>uvicorn</I> (or another ASGI server like Hypercorn).<br><br><I>Python Environment Required:</I> To run FastAPI applications, you must have Python and pip installed, and the FastAPI and Uvicorn packages installed within a Python environment (ideally a virtual environment).<br><br><I>Development vs. Production:</I> The <I>--reload</I> option is for development only. For production deployments, Uvicorn is often run behind a process manager like Gunicorn or directly by a system service (e.g., systemd), and usually fronted by a reverse proxy like Nginx or Caddy.


title: VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS
content:
Using Python <I>virtual environments</I> (<I>venv</I> or <I>conda</I>) is highly recommended for FastAPI projects. This isolates project dependencies, preventing conflicts with other Python projects or the system's global Python installation.


title: DEPLOYMENT STRATEGIES
content:
For production, running <I>Uvicorn</I> directly with <I>--reload</I> is not advised. Common strategies involve:<br><ul><li>Using <I>Gunicorn</I> to manage multiple <I>Uvicorn</I> workers (e.g., <I>gunicorn -w 4 -k uvicorn.workers.UvicornWorker main:app</I>).</li><li>Deploying with containerization technologies like <I>Docker</I>.</li><li>Setting up a reverse proxy (<I>Nginx</I>, <I>Caddy</I>) to handle SSL termination, load balancing, and serve static files, forwarding dynamic requests to the <I>Uvicorn</I> server.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>FastAPI</I> was created by Sebastián Ramírez (tiangolo) and first released in December 2018. It quickly gained popularity due to its high performance (comparable to NodeJS and Go), automatic interactive API documentation (Swagger UI and ReDoc), and its strong foundation on standard Python type hints. <I>Uvicorn</I>, the recommended server, emerged as a performant ASGI server designed to run modern asynchronous Python web frameworks. Its development paralleled the rise of ASGI, enabling Python to compete effectively in the asynchronous web services space, which FastAPI leveraged fully.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Run a FastAPI app with automatic reload (for development)</b>`fastapi run [path/to/file.py] --reload`<br><b>Serve your app in both development mode</b>`fastapi dev [path/to/file.py]`<br><b>Specify the host and port to run on</b>`fastapi run [path/to/file.py] --host [host_address] --port [port]`<br><b>Set the app variable name (if not app) or specify a custom app directory</b>`fastapi run [path/to/file.py] --app-dir [path/to/app] --app [custom_app_name]`<br><b>Display help</b>`fastapi --help`<br><b>Display help for a subcommand</b>`fastapi [subcommand] --help`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mc</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>&lt;arguments...&gt;</i>] [<i>&lt;flags...&gt;</i>]<br><br><i>Examples:</i><br><b>mc</b> <b>ls</b> s3-alias/mybucket<br><b>mc</b> <b>cp</b> local-file.txt s3-alias/mybucket/<br><b>mc</b> <b>admin</b> <b>info</b> s3-alias


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>command</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific operation to perform (e.g., <b>ls</b>, <b>cp</b>, <b>mb</b>, <b>admin</b>). Each command has its own set of arguments and flags.<br><br><b><i>arguments...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Values required by the specific command, such as source/target paths, bucket names, or user credentials.<br><br><b><i>flags...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optional modifiers that alter the behavior of the command or provide additional functionality.<br><br><b><b>--config-dir</b> <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the configuration folder for <b>mc</b>.<br><br><b><b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses verbose output, showing only essential information or errors.<br><br><b><b>--no-color</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables color output in the terminal.<br><br><b><b>--json</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Formats the output as JSON, useful for scripting and programmatic consumption.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables debug output, providing more detailed information for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>--insecure</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables TLS/SSL certificate verification when connecting to servers. Use with caution in production.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the <b>mc</b> client version and exits.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for <b>mc</b> or a specific subcommand.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mc</b> command, commonly referred to as the MinIO Client command-line interface (CLI), is a powerful and versatile tool for interacting with S3-compatible object storage systems, including MinIO servers and Amazon S3. It provides a rich set of functionalities that mimic standard Unix commands, allowing users to perform operations like listing objects, copying files, creating and removing buckets, and synchronizing data efficiently from the terminal.<br><br><b>mc</b> is designed for high-performance and large-scale data operations, making it an essential utility for developers and administrators working with object storage. It supports various authentication methods and offers features like server-side encryption, versioning, and lifecycle management, providing comprehensive control over data stored in object storage environments. The <b>mc</b> client is cross-platform, available for Linux, macOS, and Windows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using the <b>--insecure</b> flag should be strictly avoided in production environments due to significant security risks.<br>Operations involving large datasets (e.g., <b>mc mirror</b>, <b>mc cp -r</b>) can consume substantial network bandwidth and local disk space.<br><b>mc</b> operations are constrained by the permissions of the credentials used, which are managed on the S3 server side.


title: ALIASES
content:
Before using <b>mc</b> to interact with remote S3 endpoints, you typically need to configure an alias using the <b>mc alias set</b> command. An alias assigns a short name to an S3 endpoint along with its access credentials, simplifying subsequent commands (e.g., <b>my-s3-alias/mybucket</b> instead of a full URL and credentials).


title: CORE OPERATIONS
content:
<b>mc</b> supports a wide range of operations categorized into various subcommands, including but not limited to:<br><b>Data Management:</b> <b>ls</b>, <b>cp</b>, <b>mv</b>, <b>rm</b>, <b>cat</b>, <b>stat</b>, <b>mb</b>, <b>rb</b>, <b>mirror</b>, <b>find</b>.<br><b>Configuration & Alias Management:</b> <b>alias</b>, <b>config</b>.<br><b>Administrative Tasks:</b> <b>admin</b> (for managing MinIO servers, e.g., users, policies, server info, service restart).<br>This broad set of commands allows for comprehensive management of object storage.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>mc</b> command is an integral part of the MinIO project, an open-source, high-performance object storage server compatible with Amazon S3 APIs. Developed by MinIO Inc., <b>mc</b> was created to provide a native, efficient, and user-friendly command-line interface for interacting with MinIO servers and other S3-compatible services.<br><br>Its development has focused on mimicking familiar Unix commands to ease adoption, while also incorporating features specific to object storage, such as parallel uploads and downloads, and advanced administrative capabilities. <b>mc</b> has continuously evolved alongside the MinIO server, with regular updates introducing new commands, improving performance, and enhancing security features, making it a robust tool for modern cloud-native applications and data infrastructure.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Add connection to a S3 server</b>`mc alias set [local] [http://localhost:9000] [access_key] [secret_key]`<br><b>Create a bucket</b>`mc mb [local/bucket_name]`<br><b>List buckets and their content recursively</b>`mc ls [local] --recursive`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<pre>impacket-psexec [options] [[domain/]username[:password]@]&lt;target&gt; [command]</pre><br> <I>&lt;target&gt;</I> can be an IP address or hostname.<br>If <I>command</I> is omitted, an interactive command shell will be provided.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>[[domain/]username[:password]@]&lt;target&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the authentication credentials and target. <I>domain</I> is optional; <I>password</I> can be omitted if not required or if using `-no-pass`. <I>&lt;target&gt;</I> is the IP address or hostname of the remote Windows system.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's help message and exit.<br><br><b>-debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Turn on debug output.<br><br><b>-codec <CODEC></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the codec to decode the data. Common examples: <I>latin-1</I>, <I>utf-8</I>.<br><br><b>-target-ip <TARGET_IP></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;IP Address of the target machine. If this parameter is specified, the target name will be resolved to this IP instead of through DNS.<br><br><b>-port <PORT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;SMB port to connect to (default: <I>445</I>).<br><br><b>-no-pass</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't ask for a password. Useful when authentication is handled by other means (e.g., Kerberos tickets).<br><br><b>-k</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use Kerberos authentication instead of NTLM. You must have a valid Kerberos ticket (TGT) in your ticket cache.<br><br><b>-A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use AES256-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 in Kerberos.<br><br><b>-dc-ip <DC_IP></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;IP address of the Domain Controller. If omitted, the tool will try to resolve it via DNS.<br><br><b>-hashes <LMHASH:NTHASH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use NTLM hashes for authentication instead of a password. Format is <I>LMHASH:NTHASH</I> (e.g., <I>aad3b435b51404eeaad3b435b51404ee:31d6cfe0d16ae931b73c59d7e0c089c0</I>).<br><br><b>-share <SHARE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Share name to connect to for file operations (default: <I>ADMIN$</I>).<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not delete the service (for debugging purposes).<br><br><b>-x</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run command through <I>cmd.exe /C</I>. This is useful for single commands that do not require an interactive shell.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run the command as <I>SYSTEM</I> user. Requires local administrator privileges to elevate.<br><br><b>-r <REMOTE_PATH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remote file path where the temporary executable will be stored (default: <I>C:\Windows\Temp</I>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
impacket-psexec is a Python script that is part of the extensive <I>Impacket</I> library, a collection of Python classes for working with network protocols. It reimplements the functionality of <I>PsExec</I> from <I>Sysinternals</I>, allowing users to execute commands or obtain an interactive shell on remote Windows systems. <br><br>The tool primarily leverages the <I>Server Message Block (SMB)</I> and <I>Distributed Computing Environment / Remote Procedure Call (DCE/RPC)</I> protocols, specifically interacting with the <I>Service Control Manager (SCM)</I> on the target machine. It works by uploading a temporary service executable (or script) to the `ADMIN$` share, creating and starting a service on the remote machine that executes the desired command or shell, and then deleting the service and the temporary file upon completion. <br><br>While <I>impacket-psexec</I> is valuable for system administrators requiring cross-platform remote management capabilities, it is also widely utilized in cybersecurity for penetration testing and red teaming exercises, particularly for lateral movement within a Windows domain. Its ability to authenticate using various methods, including passwords, NTLM hashes, and Kerberos tickets, makes it a versatile tool in different network environments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Administrative Privileges Required:</b> <br>To successfully execute commands or gain a shell, the provided credentials must have local administrator privileges on the target Windows system.<br><b>Security Detection:</b> <br>The method of creating and deleting temporary services is often monitored by Endpoint Detection and Response (EDR) solutions and Antivirus (AV) software, potentially leading to detection or blocking.<br><b>Firewall Considerations:</b> <br>The target system's firewall must allow inbound connections on TCP port <I>445</I> (SMB).<br><b>Network Latency:</b> <br>High network latency can impact the responsiveness of the interactive shell.<br><b>User Context:</b> <br>Commands are typically executed in the context of the user whose credentials are provided, unless the `-s` flag is used to elevate to <I>SYSTEM</I>.


title: AUTHENTICATION METHODS
content:
`impacket-psexec` supports several authentication methods. The most common are password-based, NTLM hash-based (using the `-hashes` flag), and Kerberos authentication (using the `-k` flag, often combined with `-dc-ip` for domain environments). This flexibility allows it to operate effectively in various network security configurations, including scenarios where cleartext passwords are not available.


title: EXECUTION FLOW
content:
Upon execution, `impacket-psexec` connects to the target's SMB share (typically <I>ADMIN$</I>). It then uploads a temporary executable (often named randomly like <I>B70E.tmp</I>) to the target's <I>C:\Windows\Temp</I> directory. Next, it interacts with the <I>Service Control Manager</I> via RPC to create a new service configured to run this temporary executable. Once the service starts and executes the command or shell, the output is redirected back to the client. Finally, the service is stopped, deleted, and the temporary executable file is removed from the target system (unless the `-c` flag is used).


title: INTERACTIVE SHELL VS. SINGLE COMMAND
content:
When no command is provided after the target, `impacket-psexec` will attempt to provide an interactive command prompt on the remote system, allowing for continuous command execution. If a command is specified, the tool will execute that single command and then terminate, returning its output. For single commands, using the `-x` flag often ensures cleaner execution without an interactive shell setup.


title: HISTORY
content:
The `impacket-psexec` script is an integral part of the <I>Impacket</I> library, an open-source project initiated by <I>SecureAuth (now Fortra / Core Security)</I>. <I>Impacket</I> was developed to provide Python classes for programmatic access to network protocols, primarily focusing on Microsoft's authentication and network protocols. <br><br>The original <I>PsExec</I> utility was created by <I>Mark Russinovich</I> as part of his <I>Sysinternals</I> suite, which was later acquired by <I>Microsoft</I>. <I>PsExec</I> gained widespread adoption among Windows administrators for its ability to execute processes on remote systems. <br><br>`impacket-psexec` emerged as a cross-platform (primarily Linux/macOS) alternative, allowing users to leverage <I>PsExec</I>-like functionality without relying on Windows binaries. Its development has continuously evolved with new authentication methods and features, making it a staple in network administration and cybersecurity toolkits for its robust remote execution capabilities.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<I>impacket-wmiexec(1)</I>: Another Impacket tool for remote command execution using WMI., <I>impacket-smbclient(1)</I>: Impacket's SMB client for interacting with SMB shares., <I>smbclient(1)</I>: A traditional Linux client for interacting with SMB/CIFS shares., <I>crackmapexec(1)</I>: A powerful tool for pentesting Windows networks, often incorporating PsExec-like functionality., <I>msfconsole(1)</I>: The Metasploit Framework console, which includes various PsExec modules.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code>gdm-stop</code> (conceptual/legacy)<br><br><I>Note: For modern systems, use <code>sudo systemctl stop gdm</code></I>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>gdm-stop</b> command, or more accurately the action of stopping the GNOME Display Manager (GDM), is used to terminate the GDM service. GDM is the default display manager for the GNOME desktop environment, responsible for displaying the graphical login screen, managing user sessions, and starting the graphical environment upon user login.<br><br>Historically, this might have been achieved through specific init scripts like <I>/etc/init.d/gdm stop</I>. In modern Linux distributions that use <I>systemd</I>, the preferred and most common method to stop GDM is by using the command <I>sudo systemctl stop gdm</I>. Stopping GDM will typically log out any active graphical users and return the system to a state where the display manager needs to be restarted (e.g., <I>sudo systemctl start gdm</I>) to allow graphical logins again. It is often performed during system maintenance or troubleshooting of the graphical environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Stopping the GDM service will immediately terminate all active graphical user sessions, leading to a loss of unsaved work for users logged into the GNOME desktop.<br><br>On modern Linux systems utilizing <I>systemd</I>, the direct <I>gdm-stop</I> command is generally not available as a standalone executable. Users should instead use <I>sudo systemctl stop gdm</I> to manage the GDM service.


title: IMPACT ON USER SESSIONS
content:
Stopping GDM forcibly terminates all active graphical sessions managed by GDM. This means any user logged into a graphical desktop will be logged out, and any unsaved work in graphical applications will be lost.


title: SERVICE MANAGEMENT
content:
GDM is managed as a system service. Its state (running, stopped, enabled, disabled) is controlled by the init system, typically <I>systemd</I>, ensuring it starts automatically at boot if enabled and can be managed by administrators.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of stopping the GDM service has evolved significantly with changes in Linux init systems. In older distributions using SysVinit or Upstart, stopping GDM involved executing specific scripts (e.g., <I>/etc/init.d/gdm stop</I>). With the widespread adoption of <I>systemd</I> as the standard init system, the management of services like GDM shifted to the <I>systemctl</I> command. While a direct <I>gdm-stop</I> command might have existed as a wrapper or a specific script in some contexts, its primary function has been absorbed by the more generic and powerful <I>systemctl</I> utility for service management.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Create a new empty change on top of current revision</b>`jj new`<br><b>Create a new empty change on top of specific revision</b>`jj new [revision]`<br><b>Create a new merge change on top of multiple revisions</b>`jj new [revset1 revset2 ...]`<br><b>Create a new empty change before and after specified revisions</b>`jj new [[-B|--insert-before]] [revsets] [[-A|--insert-after]] [revsets]`


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Execute an Open MPI program</b>`mpirun [path/to/executable]`<br><b>Execute an Open MPI program with n parallel processes</b>`mpirun -n [n] [path/to/executable]`<br><b>Allow more processes than available physical cores</b>`mpirun -oversubscribe [path/to/executable]`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mc</b> <i>[GLOBAL FLAGS]</i> COMMAND <i>[FLAGS]</i> <i>[ARGUMENTS...]</i><br><br>Examples of common command usage:<br><b>mc ls</b> <i>[ALIAS/]BUCKET[/PREFIX]</i><br><b>mc cp</b> <i>SOURCE</i> <i>TARGET</i><br><b>mc config host add</b> <i>ALIAS</i> <i>ENDPOINT</i> <i>ACCESS_KEY</i> <i>SECRET_KEY</i> <i>[API_SIGNATURE]</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>ls</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists buckets, objects, and prefixes on a remote S3-compatible service. Similar to Unix <b>ls</b>.<br><br><b><b>cp</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Copies objects from one location to another, supporting local to remote, remote to local, or remote to remote transfers. Similar to Unix <b>cp</b>.<br><br><b><b>mb</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new bucket on the S3-compatible service. Similar to Unix <b>mkdir</b>.<br><br><b><b>rb</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes a bucket. The bucket must be empty unless the <b>--force</b> flag is used.<br><br><b><b>cat</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the content of an object to standard output. Similar to Unix <b>cat</b>.<br><br><b><b>stat</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays metadata for a bucket or object, including size, creation date, and ETag.<br><br><b><b>sync</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Synchronizes content between two locations (local, remote, or remote to remote), ensuring destinations match sources.<br><br><b><b>config</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages host aliases and configuration settings for connecting to different S3-compatible services.<br><br><b><b>policy</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages bucket policies, controlling access permissions for users and groups.<br><br><b><b>admin</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides administrative commands for managing MinIO servers, including users, groups, service health, and more.<br><br><b><b>--json</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs command results in JSON format, useful for scripting and programmatic consumption.<br><br><b><b>--recursive</b> or <b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs operations recursively on directories/buckets and their contents.<br><br><b><b>--help</b> or <b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for a command or subcommand.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mc</b> command, often referred to as the MinIO Client, is a powerful and versatile command-line tool designed for interacting with MinIO servers and other S3-compatible object storage services. It provides a familiar Unix-like interface, enabling users to manage buckets and objects with commands akin to <b>ls</b>, <b>cp</b>, <b>mv</b>, and <b>rm</b>. Beyond basic file operations, <b>mc</b> offers advanced features like data synchronization, policy management, user/group administration (with its <b>mc admin</b> subcommand), and support for various authentication methods. It's an essential tool for developers and administrators working with cloud-native applications and large datasets on object storage.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>mc</b> command requires an initial configuration step using <b>mc config host add</b> to define aliases for S3-compatible endpoints before most operations can be performed.<br>Permissions for operations are determined by the policies associated with the access key used for authentication.<br>For large-scale synchronization, ensure sufficient network bandwidth and local disk space.


title: ALIASES AND REMOTE PATHS
content:
<b>mc</b> uses the concept of 'aliases' to refer to configured remote S3 endpoints. A path to an S3 bucket or object typically starts with an alias, e.g., <i>myremote/mybucket/myobject.txt</i>. This makes interacting with multiple cloud storage services seamless.


title: PIPING AND STREAMING
content:
Many <b>mc</b> commands support piping, allowing data to be streamed directly between commands or to/from other Unix utilities without intermediate disk storage, enhancing efficiency for large data operations.


title: HISTORY
content:
MinIO was founded in 2014, and the <b>mc</b> command-line client was developed alongside its object storage server. Its design emphasizes simplicity, high performance, and compatibility with the Amazon S3 API. Over the years, it has evolved to become a comprehensive tool for managing S3-compatible storage, widely adopted in cloud-native environments for its Unix-like usability and rich feature set.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code><b>dnf</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <b>install</b> [<i>PACKAGE_SPEC</i>...]</code><br><br><i>PACKAGE_SPEC</i> can be a package name, a file path to an RPM, a group name, or a glob expression.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--assumeyes, -y</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically answer yes to all questions during the installation process.<br><br><b>--downloadonly</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Download packages but do not install them. They are saved in the DNF cache.<br><br><b>--nogpgcheck</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable GPG signature checking for packages. Use with caution as it bypasses security checks.<br><br><b>--installroot=<path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Install packages into an alternative root directory, useful for chroot environments.<br><br><b>--exclude=<package_spec></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude specific packages or package groups from the installation process.<br><br><b>--enablerepo=<repo_id></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable specific repositories for this command instance, even if they are normally disabled.<br><br><b>--disablerepo=<repo_id></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable specific repositories for this command instance, even if they are normally enabled.<br><br><b>--allowerasing</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allow erasing of installed packages to resolve dependencies. Useful during upgrades or complex dependency changes.<br><br><b>--best</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Try to install the best candidate package from all enabled repositories, typically the highest version available.<br><br><b>--setopt=<option=value></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a specific DNF configuration option for this command, overriding default or system-wide settings.<br><br><b>--releasever=<version></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the value of the $releasever variable in DNF configuration, affecting repository paths.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>dnf install</code> is a subcommand of the <I>DNF</I> (Dandified YUM) package manager, used primarily on Fedora, RHEL, CentOS, and other RPM-based Linux distributions. It is the primary tool for installing new software packages on these systems. When a package name is provided, <I>DNF</I> automatically resolves and installs all necessary dependencies, ensuring the software functions correctly. It fetches packages from configured software repositories, verifies their integrity, and integrates them into the system.<br><br>This command replaced the older <I>YUM</I> package manager due to improvements in performance, dependency resolution, and API design. <code>dnf install</code> can handle multiple packages at once and provides various options to control the installation process, such as installing only if dependencies are met, checking GPG signatures, or downloading packages without installing them.<br><br>While the request refers to "dnf-install", the correct command usage is <code>dnf install</code>.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires root privileges (e.g., using <code>sudo</code>) to perform installations.<br>An active internet connection is typically needed to download packages from online repositories.<br>While <I>DNF</I> is robust, complex dependency conflicts can occasionally arise, especially when mixing repositories or installing packages from unofficial sources.<br>Ensure sufficient disk space is available for the packages and their dependencies before initiating an installation.


title: USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
<i>Install a single package:</i><br><code>sudo dnf install httpd</code><br><br><i>Install multiple packages:</i><br><code>sudo dnf install firefox thunderbird</code><br><br><i>Install a package and automatically confirm:</i><br><code>sudo dnf install -y mariadb-server</code><br><br><i>Download packages without installing:</i><br><code>sudo dnf install --downloadonly nginx</code><br><br><i>Install an RPM file directly:</i><br><code>sudo dnf install /path/to/my_app.rpm</code><br><br><i>Install a package from a specific enabled repository:</i><br><code>sudo dnf install --enablerepo=epel-testing mypackage</code>


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
<I>DNF</I> commands, including <code>install</code>, typically return a status of 0 on success. A non-zero exit status indicates an error, such as a package not found, a dependency resolution failure, or insufficient permissions. This allows for scripting and error checking.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>DNF</I> (Dandified YUM) was designed as a next-generation package manager to replace <I>YUM</I> (Yellowdog Updater, Modified). Development on <I>DNF</I> began around 2012, aiming to address several limitations of <I>YUM</I>, including performance issues, complex dependency resolution, and a desire for a more robust API for programmatic interaction. <I>DNF</I> uses a different dependency resolver called <I>libsolv</I>, which is known for its speed and accuracy. It first became the default package manager in Fedora 18 and later formally replaced <I>YUM</I> in Fedora 22. It was subsequently adopted by Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8 and its derivatives (like CentOS 8 and Rocky Linux). The <code>dnf install</code> command effectively carries on the core function of <code>yum install</code>.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
There is no direct command named <i>gdm-safe-restart</i> with specific syntax or options. The functionality implied by this term is typically achieved through service management commands.<br><br><b>Common alternatives for restarting GDM:</b><br><i>sudo systemctl restart gdm</i><br><i>sudo systemctl restart gdm3</i> (for some distributions)<br><i>sudo systemctl isolate graphical.target</i> (moves to graphical.target, effectively restarting GDM if already in graphical mode)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>N/A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;As 'gdm-safe-restart' is a conceptual action and not a direct command, it does not have specific command-line parameters.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The phrase "gdm-safe-restart" refers to the concept of restarting the GNOME Display Manager (GDM) in a controlled manner, typically to recover from a frozen graphical environment, apply display server configuration changes, or resolve display-related issues without requiring a full system reboot. It is important to note that <b>"gdm-safe-restart" is not a direct, standalone command</b> with its own executable and man page in most modern Linux distributions.<br><br>Instead, the functionality implied by "gdm-safe-restart" is usually achieved by interacting with the system's service manager, such as <i>systemd</i>, to restart the GDM service. The term "safe" implies an attempt to minimize disruption, though restarting GDM will inevitably close all active graphical sessions managed by it, potentially leading to data loss in unsaved applications for logged-in users. It's often used by system administrators or power users for troubleshooting graphical desktop environments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Restarting GDM, even with the intent of a "safe restart," will terminate all active graphical user sessions managed by GDM. This means any logged-in users will be logged out, and unsaved work in graphical applications will be lost. This action should only be performed when necessary and with an understanding of its consequences. It does not prevent loss of data for users who are actively working in the graphical environment.


title: ACHIEVING 'GDM SAFE RESTART'
content:
To achieve the intended effect of a 'gdm-safe-restart', users typically utilize <i>systemd</i> commands. For most systems running GNOME, the GDM service is named 'gdm.service' or 'gdm3.service'. The most common command to restart it is: <br><br><i>sudo systemctl restart gdm</i> <br><br>On some Debian/Ubuntu based systems, it might be: <br><br><i>sudo systemctl restart gdm3</i> <br><br>Another method, less direct but can achieve a similar outcome by switching runlevels/targets, is: <br><br><i>sudo systemctl isolate graphical.target</i> <br><br>This command transitions the system to the graphical target, which will start GDM if it's not running, or restart it if it's already part of the target's dependencies and a refresh is needed. <br><br>Historically, before systemd, one might have used <i>init</i> commands or direct kill signals to X processes, but these methods are generally deprecated and less safe.


title: WHEN TO USE
content:
'GDM safe restart' is typically used in scenarios such as: <br>- When the graphical environment freezes or becomes unresponsive.<br>- After making certain configuration changes that require the display server to restart (e.g., driver updates, Xorg configuration).<br>- To recover from a crashed X server without affecting other services or requiring a full system reboot.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of "safe restart" for display managers has roots in older Unix/Linux systems where X server crashes were more common, and direct ways to restart X or the display manager were sought without a full system reboot. While the specific phrase "gdm-safe-restart" might have appeared in various recovery scripts or forum discussions over time, it never materialized as a standardized, dedicated command. Modern Linux distributions primarily rely on <i>systemd</i> for service management, making commands like <i>systemctl restart gdm</i> the contemporary and robust method to achieve this functionality.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--add-readme</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Adds an initial README file to the repository.</I><br><br><b>--add-gitignore <template></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Adds a .gitignore file with a specified template (e.g., "Python", "Node").</I><br><br><b>--add-license <template></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Adds a license file with a specified template (e.g., "MIT", "Apache-2.0").</I><br><br><b>--allow-forking</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Allows the repository to be forked (default for public repos).</I><br><br><b>--confirm</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Confirms repository creation without prompting for user confirmation.</I><br><br><b>-d, --description <string></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Provides a description for the new repository.</I><br><br><b>--default-branch <name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Sets the name for the default branch (e.g., "main", "master").</I><br><br><b>--disable-issues</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Disables the issues feature for the repository.</I><br><br><b>--disable-projects</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Disables the projects feature for the repository.</I><br><br><b>--disable-wiki</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Disables the wiki feature for the repository.</I><br><br><b>--enable-lfs</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Enables Git Large File Storage (LFS) for the repository.</I><br><br><b>--enable-merge-commit</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Enables the merge commit strategy for pull requests.</I><br><br><b>--enable-rebase-merge</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Enables the rebase and merge strategy for pull requests.</I><br><br><b>--enable-squash-merge</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Enables the squash and merge strategy for pull requests.</I><br><br><b>-h, --homepage <URL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Sets the homepage URL for the repository.</I><br><br><b>-i, --internal</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Makes the repository internal (visible to organization members only).</I><br><br><b>--org <name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specifies the organization under which to create the repository.</I><br><br><b>-p, --public</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Makes the new repository public.</I><br><br><b>-r, --private</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Makes the new repository private (this is the default visibility if no other is specified).</I><br><br><b>--remote <name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Sets the name for the remote (default: "origin") when creating from a local path.</I><br><br><b>--source <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specifies a local directory path to initialize the repository from and push its contents.</I><br><br><b>--team <name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Assigns a team to the repository (for organization repos only).</I><br><br><b>--template <repository></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Creates the new repository from an existing template repository on GitHub.</I><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>gh-repo-create</B> command is an integral part of the <B>GitHub CLI</B> (Command Line Interface), designed to streamline the process of creating new repositories directly from your terminal. <Br>It eliminates the need to navigate the web UI, making repository setup faster and more efficient, especially for developers who prefer command-line workflows or scripting automated tasks. <Br><Br>This command allows users to specify various repository attributes at creation time, including its visibility (<I>public</I>, <I>private</I>, <I>internal</I>), a <I>description</I>, a <I>homepage URL</I>, and the inclusion of initial files like a <I>README</I>, <I>.gitignore</I>, or <I>license</I>. <Br><Br>Furthermore, <B>gh-repo-create</B> supports creating repositories within specific organizations, setting a default branch name, disabling features like issues or wikis, and configuring merge strategies. <Br>It can also initialize a new local Git repository and link it to the newly created remote GitHub repository, providing a seamless setup from local to remote.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<B>Authentication Required</B>: <I>You must be authenticated with GitHub CLI (`gh auth login`) to create repositories. Your authentication token needs sufficient permissions (e.g., <B>repo</B> scope).</I><Br><B>Naming Restrictions</B>: <I>Repository names must be unique within your user account or organization and adhere to GitHub's naming conventions (e.g., no spaces, certain special characters).</I><Br><B>Network Connectivity</B>: <I>An active internet connection is necessary to communicate with GitHub's servers.</I><Br><B>Organization Permissions</B>: <I>When creating repositories in an organization, you must have the necessary administrative or creation privileges within that organization.</I>


title: INTERACTIVE MODE
content:
<I>If you run <B>gh repo create</B> without any arguments (<I>e.g., just `gh repo create`</I>), it enters an interactive mode. It will prompt you step-by-step for the repository name, visibility, and other initial settings. This is particularly helpful for new users or when you're unsure of all available options.</I>


title: CREATING FROM LOCAL DIRECTORY
content:
<I>When run inside an existing local Git repository (or a directory where you want to initialize one), <B>gh repo create</B> can automatically create a new GitHub repository with the same name and push the local repository's contents to it, automatically setting up the remote connection. This streamlines the process of taking a local project to GitHub.</I>


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>The <B>gh-repo-create</B> command is a core component of the GitHub CLI, which was initially released in beta in <B>May 2020</B> and reached general availability in <B>September 2020</B>. It was designed to bring the functionality of GitHub's web interface directly to the command line, enabling developers to manage common GitHub tasks without context switching. Since its inception, <B>gh repo create</B> has been a fundamental feature, continuously updated with new flags and options to match GitHub's evolving repository features and user demands for more granular control over repository creation.</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces access to the device even if it's currently busy or handled by a kernel driver. Use with extreme caution.<br><br><b>-y</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables interactive confirmation for writes, proceeding directly. Useful in scripts.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reads back the written value(s) immediately after the write operation to verify the data.<br><br><b>I2C_BUS_NUMBER</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The number of the I2C bus to interact with (e.g., 0, 1, 2). This corresponds to /dev/i2c-N.<br><br><b>CHIP_ADDRESS</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The 7-bit I2C address of the target chip in hexadecimal format (e.g., 0x50).<br><br><b>DATA_ADDRESS</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The register address within the chip to write to, in hexadecimal format (e.g., 0x01).<br><br><b>VALUE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The data value(s) to write, in hexadecimal format. One or more values can be provided for block write modes.<br><br><b>MODE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The transfer mode, affecting how <i>DATA_ADDRESS</i> and <i>VALUE</i> are interpreted:<br><i>b</i>: Byte mode (default, writes a single byte).<br><i>w</i>: Word mode (writes a 16-bit word, low byte first).<br><i>s</i>: SMBus block write.<br><i>i</i>: I2C block write.<br><i>p</i>: Write to a PEC (Packet Error Checking) register.<br><i>c</i>: Combined write/read transaction.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>i2cset</i> is a command-line utility from the <i>i2c-tools</i> package used to write data to registers of I2C and SMBus devices. It allows specifying the I2C bus number, the chip's 7-bit I2C address, the target register address, and the value(s) to write. The command supports various data transfer modes, including byte (<b>b</b>), word (<b>w</b>), SMBus block (<b>s</b>), and I2C block (<b>i</b>), providing flexibility for different device interactions. It's an essential tool for debugging I2C hardware, configuring sensors, or interacting with EEPROMs directly from the Linux command line.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <i>i2cset</i> with the wrong addresses or values can potentially damage I2C devices or cause system instability. Always consult the device datasheet.<br>Requires root privileges or appropriate permissions to access /dev/i2c-N devices.<br>The <b>-f</b> (force) option should be used with extreme caution, as it can interfere with kernel drivers managing the device.<br>The actual <i>MODE</i> options available can vary slightly depending on the <i>i2c-tools</i> version and kernel I2C bus driver capabilities.


title: PERMISSIONS
content:
To use <i>i2cset</i>, you typically need root privileges or your user must be part of a group (like <b>i2c</b> or <b>gpio</b>) that has read/write access to the /dev/i2c-N device files.


title: BUS NUMBER DISCOVERY
content:
The correct I2C bus number (<i>I2C_BUS_NUMBER</i>) can often be found by listing /dev/i2c-* or by using <b>i2cdetect -l</b> to list all detected I2C adapters.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>i2cset</i> is part of the <i>i2c-tools</i> package, which has been a staple in Linux for interacting with I2C and SMBus devices for many years. It leverages the Linux kernel's I2C subsystem, providing a userspace interface for hardware control. Its development has focused on robustness and supporting various I2C/SMBus protocols and features.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>init</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initializes a new <i>jj</i> repository in the current directory.<br><br><b>log</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the commit history, often with more detail and context than Git's log.<br><br><b>diff</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the difference between the working copy and the current commit, or between specified commits.<br><br><b>commit</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new commit, often with options for specifying what to include or exclude.<br><br><b>branch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages branches, allowing creation, deletion, and tracking of branches.<br><br><b>rebase</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Rebases changesets onto a new parent, a core operation for history rewriting.<br><br><b>squash</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Combines multiple changesets into a single one.<br><br><b>undo</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverts the last operation, providing a powerful safety net.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Jujutsu (<i>jj</i>), often conceptually referred to as "jj-new" due to its modern approach, is an experimental and Git-compatible distributed version control system. It's designed to simplify complexities and common pain points found in traditional Git workflows. <i>jj</i> offers a more intuitive mental model for managing changes, particularly around history rewriting, diffing, and committing. Unlike Git, it treats history as inherently mutable and operates on a concept of "changesets" rather than strict commits, making operations like amending, squashing, and rebasing feel more natural and less error-prone. While it can interact seamlessly with Git repositories, it provides its own unique command-line interface and internal representation, prioritizing a clean, linear, and easily editable history by default.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Experimental and Evolving</b>: Jujutsu is still under active development; its command set, behavior, and internal structure may change.<br><b>Different Mental Model</b>: While Git-compatible, <i>jj</i> requires users to adopt a slightly different mental model for version control, which can have a learning curve.<br><b>Ecosystem Maturity</b>: Its ecosystem (tooling, integrations, community support) is not as mature as Git's.


title: DESIGN PHILOSOPHY: EDITABLE HISTORY
content:
<i>jj</i>'s core design revolves around the idea that history is inherently editable. It treats commits as "changesets" that can be easily modified, reordered, and combined. This approach simplifies workflows like interactive rebase and enables seamless management of uncommitted changes, making version control less daunting for developers.


title: GIT COMPATIBILITY
content:
While providing its own unique interface and internal logic, <i>jj</i> maintains strong compatibility with Git repositories. Users can clone Git repositories, push and pull changes to/from Git remotes, and even use <i>jj</i> within existing Git workflows, leveraging its strengths where desired without fully abandoning Git.


title: HISTORY
content:
Jujutsu (<i>jj</i>) was created by Martin Ågren, with development starting around 2020. The primary motivation was to build a version control system that simplifies complex Git workflows, particularly those involving history rewriting. It aims to provide a more intuitive and safer experience for operations like amending, rebasing, and squashing commits, which can be cumbersome in Git. Designed from the ground up to support a flexible and easily editable history, <i>jj</i> has gained traction as a promising alternative or companion for developers seeking a streamlined version control experience.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-e, --command=<i>COMMAND</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes the specified <i>COMMAND</i> instead of the default shell within the new terminal session.<br><br><b><b>-w, --working-directory=<i>DIR</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the initial working directory for the terminal session to the specified <i>DIR</i>.<br><br><b><b>-p, --profile=<i>PROFILE</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a specific terminal <i>PROFILE</i>, which defines settings like colors, fonts, and cursor style for the session.<br><br><b><b>--window-id=<i>ID</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to attach the new session to an existing window identified by <i>ID</i>. Note: This option's behavior may vary or be ignored in some contexts.<br><br><b><b>--new-window</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces <i>Ptyxis</i> to open a new top-level window. This is typically the default behavior when no other window is specified.<br><br><b><b>--quake-mode</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Launches <i>Ptyxis</i> in a special dropdown 'Quake' style mode, often appearing from the top of the screen for quick access.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the application's version information and then exits.<br><br><b><b>-?, --help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a summary of available command-line options and then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Ptyxis</i> is a modern, feature-rich graphical terminal emulator designed specifically for the GNOME desktop environment. It aims to provide a powerful and user-friendly command-line interface experience, offering capabilities beyond traditional terminals.<br><br>Key features include robust support for multiple tabs, allowing users to manage several shell sessions within a single window, and a powerful split-view functionality for displaying multiple terminal sessions simultaneously in a tiled layout. <i>Ptyxis</i> leverages the modern GTK4 toolkit, providing a responsive and visually appealing interface that integrates seamlessly with the GNOME desktop. It is developed with a focus on usability, offering features like adjustable fonts, customizable color schemes, and seamless clipboard integration. As a newer addition to the GNOME ecosystem, it seeks to be a performant and extensible alternative to existing terminal applications, catering to the needs of developers and power users alike.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>Ptyxis</i> is a relatively new project within the GNOME ecosystem, meaning it might still be undergoing active development. While it offers modern features, some advanced or niche functionalities found in more mature terminal emulators might not yet be fully implemented or optimized. Its tight integration with GNOME implies that its performance and visual consistency might be best experienced within that desktop environment.


title: <B>KEY FEATURES</B>
content:
<i>Ptyxis</i> stands out with its native support for split views, allowing users to arrange multiple terminal sessions in tiled layouts within a single window. It also offers a tabbed interface for managing various concurrent shell sessions efficiently. The 'Quake Mode' provides a convenient dropdown terminal that can be quickly summoned and dismissed from anywhere on the desktop.


title: <B>TECHNOLOGY STACK</B>
content:
Built using the modern GTK4 toolkit and the VTE (Virtual Terminal Emulator) widget, <i>Ptyxis</i> leverages the latest advancements in GNOME's development stack to deliver a performant, responsive, and visually integrated user experience. This foundation ensures compatibility with contemporary display protocols like Wayland and provides a solid base for future enhancements.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Ptyxis</i> emerged as a modern initiative within the GNOME project, aiming to provide a next-generation terminal emulator built on contemporary technologies like GTK4 and the VTE (Virtual Terminal Emulator) widget. Its development gained momentum around 2021-2022, driven by the desire to offer a more responsive, feature-rich, and visually consistent terminal experience within the evolving GNOME desktop. It is envisioned as a robust alternative or eventual successor to the long-standing <i>gnome-terminal</i>, addressing the needs of modern Linux users and developers.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-m <memory_MB></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allocates <I>memory_MB</I> megabytes of RAM to the guest system.<br><br><b>-cpu <model></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the CPU model to emulate, e.g., <I>qemu32</I> or <I>pentium3</I>.<br><br><b>-smp <cpus>[,cores=<cores>][,threads=<threads>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the number of virtual CPUs, cores per socket, and threads per core for the guest.<br><br><b>-hda <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attaches <I>file</I> as the primary hard disk image (IDE interface).<br><br><b>-cdrom <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attaches <I>file</I> as a virtual CD-ROM drive.<br><br><b>-boot <order></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the boot device order (e.g., <I>d</I> for CD-ROM, <I>c</I> for hard disk, <I>n</I> for network).<br><br><b>-net nic -net user</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Configures a network interface card with user-mode networking (SLIRP), providing NAT-like connectivity.<br><br><b>-display <type></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the display output method (e.g., <I>gtk</I>, <I>sdl</I>, <I>none</I> for no graphical output).<br><br><b>-enable-kvm</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables Kernel-based Virtual Machine (KVM) acceleration for near-native performance on Linux hosts.<br><br><b>-nographic</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs QEMU without a graphical output, often used for server VMs with serial console access.<br><br><b>-snapshot</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents changes from being written back to the disk image, running from a temporary overlay.<br><br><b>-usb, -usbdevice <dev></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables USB support for the guest and optionally attaches a specific host USB device.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
QEMU, the Quick EMUlator, is a powerful and versatile open-source machine emulator and virtualizer. The <I>qemu-system-i386</I> command specifically targets the emulation of a 32-bit x86 (i386) computer system. It can run operating systems and programs made for i386 processors on various host architectures, making it invaluable for running legacy software, testing new OS installations, or for cross-development environments where a full 32-bit x86 system is required. <br><br>When used on a Linux host with kernel virtualization support (like KVM), <I>qemu-system-i386</I> can operate in a hardware-accelerated virtualization mode, providing near-native performance. Without KVM, it performs full system emulation, translating CPU instructions on the fly, which is slower but allows running i386 guests on non-x86 hosts. It supports various virtual hardware components including CPUs, memory, disk controllers, network cards, and graphics adapters, offering a comprehensive virtual environment. Its flexibility and open-source nature make it a cornerstone of many virtualization setups.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While powerful, <I>qemu-system-i386</I> has some considerations:<br><br><I>1. Performance:</I> Without KVM acceleration, full system emulation can be significantly slower than native execution or hardware-assisted virtualization.<br><I>2. Complexity:</I> QEMU offers a vast array of options, which can be daunting for new users. Setting up complex network configurations or device passthrough often requires detailed knowledge.<br><I>3. Security:</I> Improper configuration, especially related to networking or device passthrough, can potentially introduce security vulnerabilities to the host system.<br><I>4. Resource Usage:</I> Emulating a full system consumes host resources (CPU, RAM, disk I/O), which must be managed carefully, especially when running multiple virtual machines.


title: NETWORKING MODES
content:
QEMU supports several networking modes, each with different use cases:<br><br><b>User-mode Networking (SLIRP):</b> Simplest to set up using <I>-net user</I>. The guest gets an IP address on a virtual network, and QEMU acts as a NAT gateway. Guests can reach external networks but cannot be easily reached from the outside unless port forwarding is configured.<br><br><b>Bridge Networking:</b> Uses a Linux bridge device (<I>brctl</I>) to connect the guest's virtual network interface directly to the host's physical network. This allows the guest to appear as a separate machine on the LAN, getting its own IP address from the router. Requires more setup but offers full network access.<br><br><b>TAP/TUN Devices:</b> Manual configuration of virtual network interfaces that connect directly to the guest. Used for advanced networking setups, including custom routing and VPNs.


title: HISTORY
content:
QEMU was originally developed by Fabrice Bellard and first released in 2003. It began as a full-system emulator capable of running ARM binaries on an x86 host, but quickly expanded to support x86 emulation. A significant development was the integration with KVM (Kernel-based Virtual Machine) in 2007, which allowed QEMU to leverage hardware virtualization extensions (Intel VT-x, AMD-V) present in modern CPUs. This transformed QEMU from solely an emulator into a powerful, high-performance hypervisor, widely adopted in both personal and data center environments. The <I>qemu-system-i386</I> command reflects QEMU's foundational role in emulating 32-bit x86 architectures, which was crucial for its early development and continues to be relevant for legacy systems and specific testing scenarios.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<I>qemu-system-x86_64</I>(1): The 64-bit x86 system emulator., <I>qemu-img</I>(1): QEMU disk image utility for creating, converting, and managing disk images., <I>kvm</I>(1): Kernel-based Virtual Machine, the Linux kernel module for virtualization., <I>virsh</I>(1): Command-line interface for managing virtual machines via libvirt., <I>virt-manager</I>(1): Graphical user interface for managing virtual machines.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>&lt;input-file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the source <i>pixel art</i> image file (e.g., <b>.png</b>, <b>.gif</b>, <b>.bmp</b>) that needs to be vectorized.<br><br><b><i>[output-file]</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path for the generated vector graphics file. The extension typically determines the output format (e.g., <b>.svg</b>, <b>.eps</b>). If omitted, output might be directed to <i>stdout</i> or a default filename derived from the input.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--threshold</b> <i>&lt;value&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the color difference threshold for edge detection. A lower value detects more subtle color changes as edges, potentially creating more paths. Values typically range from 0 to 255.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--colors</b> <i>&lt;num&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reduces the image to a specified number of colors before vectorization. Useful for simplifying complex pixel art or achieving a specific palette look.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--smooth</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies a smoothing algorithm to the vectorized paths, potentially rounding sharp corners or simplifying jagged lines. Use with caution to preserve the original <i>pixel art</i> aesthetic.<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--format</b> <i>&lt;fmt&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output vector format (e.g., <b>svg</b>, <b>eps</b>, <b>pdf</b>). This option overrides the format implied by the <i>[output-file]</i> extension.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing progress and detailed information about the vectorization process.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>vectorize-pixelart</b> command is a conceptual utility designed to transform low-resolution <i>pixel art</i> raster images into smooth, scalable <i>vector graphics</i>. It aims to accurately detect the distinct blocks of color and sharp edges characteristic of pixel art and convert them into precise vector paths, typically in formats like <b>SVG</b>. This process allows pixel art to be scaled infinitely without loss of detail or introduction of pixelation, making it ideal for high-resolution displays, print, or responsive web design where crisp, clean lines are paramount. While maintaining the original aesthetic, it provides the flexibility of vector formats, suitable for game development assets, logos, and digital illustrations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Please note: "<b>vectorize-pixelart</b>" is not a standard or widely distributed Linux command. This analysis provides a conceptual representation of what such a command would likely entail, based on its descriptive name and common image processing utilities. Actual tools for vectorizing pixel art often exist as part of larger image manipulation suites (like Inkscape's Trace Bitmap feature) or specialized scripts. Be aware that the quality of vectorization can vary greatly depending on the input pixel art's complexity and the algorithm's sophistication, potentially requiring manual cleanup for perfect results.


title: UNDERLYING PRINCIPLES
content:
The hypothetical operation of <b>vectorize-pixelart</b> would involve several image processing steps:<br><br>1. <b>Color Quantization</b>: Reducing the number of distinct colors in the image.<br>2. <b>Edge Detection</b>: Identifying the precise boundaries between different color regions or distinct pixels.<br>3. <b>Path Tracing</b>: Converting these detected edges into mathematical vector paths, often using algorithms that fit Bezier curves or polygons.<br>4. <b>Path Simplification</b>: Optimizing the number of points in the vector paths to reduce file size and improve smoothness without losing critical detail from the original pixel art.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>wifi-menu</B> [<I>interface</I>]<br><B>wifi-menu</B> [-o | --old] [<I>interface</I>]<br><B>wifi-menu</B> [-h | --help]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>interface</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the wireless network interface to configure (e.g., <B>wlan0</B>, <B>wlp2s0</B>). If not provided, <B>wifi-menu</B> attempts to detect the first available wireless interface.<br><br><b>-o, --old</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses an older, simpler interface for network selection and configuration. This might be useful in environments with limited terminal capabilities or for a more basic workflow.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<B>wifi-menu</B> is a command-line utility designed to simplify the process of configuring wireless network connections on Linux systems, primarily those utilizing the <I>netctl</I> network management framework, common in Arch Linux environments. It provides a user-friendly, ncurses-based (text-based graphical) interface that guides users through scanning for available Wi-Fi networks, selecting a network from a list, and entering necessary credentials such as passphrases. <br><br>Upon successful configuration, <B>wifi-menu</B> automatically generates a <I>netctl</I> profile for the selected network and stores it in the <B>/etc/netctl/</B> directory. This profile can then be managed and activated using other <I>netctl</I> commands like <B>netctl start <I>profile_name</I></B> or <B>netctl enable <I>profile_name</I></B> for automatic connection at boot. Its primary goal is to abstract away the complexities of direct <I>wpa_supplicant</I> and <I>iw</I> commands, offering a quick and intuitive way to get online with Wi-Fi.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<B>netctl</B> Dependency: <B>wifi-menu</B> is part of the <B>netctl</B> package and requires it to be installed and operational on the system. It is not a standalone Wi-Fi management tool for other network frameworks like NetworkManager or systemd-networkd.<br><br>Arch Linux Focus: While usable on other distributions that install <B>netctl</B>, <B>wifi-menu</B> is most commonly associated with and maintained for Arch Linux and its derivatives.<br><br>Interface Requirement: It operates exclusively on wireless network interfaces. Ensure your wireless adapter is recognized and its kernel module is loaded.<br><br>Limited Advanced Configuration: While excellent for basic WPA/WPA2-PSK networks, it may not directly support highly advanced configurations (e.g., enterprise EAP methods, static IP for Wi-Fi) without subsequent manual editing of the generated <I>netctl</I> profile.<br><br>Interactive Nature: It requires an interactive terminal session to display its ncurses interface. It is not suitable for non-interactive scripts without additional wrappers.


title: PROFILE GENERATION LOCATION
content:
After a successful configuration, <B>wifi-menu</B> generates a new <I>netctl</I> profile file in the <B>/etc/netctl/</B> directory. The file name typically corresponds to the chosen SSID. This profile can then be manually edited for advanced settings or managed using other <B>netctl</B> commands.


title: REQUIRED DEPENDENCIES
content:
<B>wifi-menu</B> relies on several external utilities to function correctly. These include <B>dialog</B> or <B>whiptail</B> for its interactive ncurses interface, and <B>wpa_supplicant</B> for handling Wi-Fi authentication and encryption processes.


title: HISTORY
content:
<B>wifi-menu</B> was developed as an integral part of the <B>netctl</B> project, which emerged as a lightweight and robust network configuration utility primarily for Arch Linux. Its creation addressed the need for an easy-to-use, interactive tool for setting up wireless connections, bridging the gap between manual configuration using tools like <B>wpa_supplicant</B> and more complex desktop-environment-integrated network managers. Since its inception, <B>wifi-menu</B> has been a staple for Arch Linux users, offering a consistent and reliable way to get Wi-Fi operational, especially during initial system setup or in minimal environments. Its development has focused on maintaining simplicity and tight integration with the <B>netctl</B> profile system.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<B>netctl</B>(8), <B>netctl-auto</B>(8), <B>netctl-ifplugd</B>(8), <B>wpa_supplicant</B>(8), <B>iw</B>(8)


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>wkhtmltopdf</i> [OPTIONS] &lt;input file/url&gt; [output file]<br><i>wkhtmltopdf</i> [OPTIONS] &lt;input file/url&gt;... &lt;output file&gt;<br><br><b>Examples:</b><br><i>wkhtmltopdf</i> https://example.com output.pdf<br><i>wkhtmltopdf</i> --orientation Landscape --margin-top 10mm input.html output.pdf<br><i>wkhtmltopdf</i> cover.html content.html toc --footer-center "Page [page] of [toPage]" combined.pdf


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available options.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the version information of the <i>wkhtmltopdf</i> tool.<br><br><b>--page-size &lt;Size&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the paper size of the output PDF (e.g., A4, Letter, Legal).<br><br><b>--orientation &lt;Orientation&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the page orientation to Portrait or Landscape.<br><br><b>--margin-top &lt;unit&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the top margin of the page (e.g., 10mm, 0.5in).<br><br><b>--margin-bottom &lt;unit&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the bottom margin of the page.<br><br><b>--margin-left &lt;unit&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the left margin of the page.<br><br><b>--margin-right &lt;unit&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the right margin of the page.<br><br><b>--enable-javascript</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables JavaScript execution on the web page during rendering.<br><br><b>--disable-javascript</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables JavaScript execution on the web page.<br><br><b>--grayscale</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts the output PDF document to grayscale.<br><br><b>--lowquality</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates the PDF document in a lower quality (smaller file size).<br><br><b>--no-background</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Does not print the background of the web page.<br><br><b>--header-html &lt;url&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a header to each page, loaded from the specified HTML URL or file path.<br><br><b>--footer-html &lt;url&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a footer to each page, loaded from the specified HTML URL or file path.<br><br><b>--header-center &lt;text&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the text to be displayed in the center of the header. Can include placeholders like [page].<br><br><b>--footer-right &lt;text&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the text to be displayed on the right side of the footer. Use placeholders like [page] for page numbers.<br><br><b>--title &lt;text&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the title of the PDF document, visible in PDF viewers' document properties.<br><br><b>--zoom &lt;float&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the zoom factor for the page contents (e.g., 1.5 for 150% zoom).<br><br><b>--enable-forms</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables smart PDF form fields (default behavior).<br><br><b>--disable-smart-shrinking</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the intelligent shrinking strategy that tries to fit content on the page.<br><br><b>--cookie &lt;name&gt; &lt;value&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a cookie to be sent with requests for the input HTML.<br><br><b>--username &lt;username&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a username for HTTP authentication (basic/digest).<br><br><b>--password &lt;password&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a password for HTTP authentication (basic/digest).<br><br><b>--print-media-type</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the 'print' media type CSS instead of 'screen' for rendering.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>wkhtmltopdf</i> is an open-source command-line tool that renders HTML content into PDF documents using the WebKit rendering engine, the same engine used by Safari and older Chrome versions. It's built on Qt, providing a robust and versatile solution for converting web pages, reports, or any HTML-formatted content into high-quality, printable PDF files.<br><br>This tool is widely used for server-side PDF generation, allowing developers to programmatically create documents from dynamic web content, invoices, tickets, or reports. It supports various HTML and CSS features, JavaScript execution, and offers extensive options for controlling page size, orientation, margins, headers, footers, and other PDF-specific attributes, making it a flexible choice for a wide range of document generation needs. Its ability to accurately render complex web layouts makes it a preferred choice over simpler HTML-to-PDF converters.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>JavaScript Limitations:</b> While JavaScript is supported, certain browser-specific APIs (e.g., <i>window.print()</i>, <i>alert()</i>, <i>confirm()</i>) are not available or behave differently. Asynchronous operations might require careful handling (e.g., using --javascript-delay).<br><b>WebKit Version Dependency:</b> The rendering engine (WebKit) is based on the version of Qt used, which might be older than the latest browser engines. This can lead to minor rendering differences for very modern CSS/HTML features.<br><b>Resource Loading:</b> Issues can arise with relative paths or local file permissions when loading assets (images, CSS, JS) from local HTML files, especially in server environments.<br><b>Table of Contents (TOC):</b> Generating a TOC requires a separate "object" and relies on proper heading tags (<i>h1</i>, <i>h2</i>, etc.) in the input HTML.


title: SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS
content:
When converting untrusted HTML content, be aware of potential risks. Malicious JavaScript or external resource loading could potentially cause issues if not contained. It's advisable to sanitize input or run the command in a sandboxed environment if dealing with external or user-provided HTML.


title: INTEGRATION PATTERNS
content:
<i>wkhtmltopdf</i> is often integrated into web applications (e.g., using PHP, Python, Node.js libraries) to generate dynamic PDFs on the fly for invoices, reports, or e-tickets. It can be called as a subprocess, piping HTML input and capturing PDF output, making it highly versatile for backend automation.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>wkhtmltopdf</i> originated as an open-source project, leveraging the WebKit rendering engine embedded via the Qt framework. Its development began to address the need for a reliable, cross-platform command-line tool capable of producing high-fidelity PDF documents from HTML. Over the years, it gained significant popularity, especially in server-side applications, due to its ability to accurately render complex web pages including JavaScript-driven content. While the core WebKit engine used can sometimes lag behind the latest browser innovations, its stability and extensive feature set have kept it a preferred choice for many document generation tasks. Development continues, with ongoing efforts to maintain compatibility and improve performance.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-display <I>display</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X display to connect to.<br><br><b>-geometry <I>geometry</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the initial size and position of the eyes window, e.g., '100x50+10+10'.<br><br><b>-fg <I>color</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the foreground color (pupils and eyelids). Defaults to black.<br><br><b>-bg <I>color</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the background color (whites of the eyes). Defaults to white.<br><br><b>-bordercolor <I>color</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the color of the window border.<br><br><b>-borderwidth <I>pixels</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the width of the window border in pixels.<br><br><b>-shape</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;If specified, the eyes window will be shaped to the actual eye outline rather than being a rectangular window, providing a more integrated look.<br><br><b>-fork</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Detaches <I>xeyes</I> from the controlling terminal after it starts up, allowing the terminal to be used for other commands.<br><br><b>-name <I>name</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the application name used for resource lookups.<br><br><b>-title <I>title</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the window title.<br><br><b>-iconic</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the application as an icon.<br><br><b>-rv</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverses the foreground and background colors (reverse video).<br><br><b>-help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a summary of command line options.<br><br><b>-version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the program version information.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>xeyes</I> is a classic graphical utility for the X Window System that displays a pair of animated eyes. These eyes dynamically track the movement of your mouse cursor across the screen, providing a whimsical and interactive visual element to your desktop. It serves primarily as a fun, decorative application, often used to demonstrate the basic capabilities and responsiveness of an X server. Despite its simplicity, <I>xeyes</I> has become an iconic part of the X Window System's history, symbolizing the playful and experimental nature of early graphical environments. It's a lightweight application, consuming minimal system resources, and continues to be available in most modern Linux distributions as part of the X11 application suite.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><I>xeyes</I> requires an active X Window System server to run, making it incompatible with text-only environments or Wayland by default (though it can run on Wayland via XWayland compatibility layer).</li><li>It is primarily a decorative application and offers no practical utility beyond visual amusement.</li><li>While lightweight, it's considered an older, legacy application by some and might not align with modern minimalist desktop philosophies.</li></ul>


title: X RESOURCES CONFIGURATION
content:
Like many X applications, <I>xeyes</I> can be configured via X resources. These resources can be set in files like `.Xdefaults` or `.Xresources` in your home directory, or via the `xrdb` utility. This allows for persistent customization of its appearance (e.g., colors, geometry) without needing to specify command-line options every time.<br>Example: <I>xeyes*foreground: red</I><br><I>xeyes*background: blue</I><br><I>xeyes*shape: true</I>


title: DEMONSTRATION TOOL
content:
<I>xeyes</I> is often used in educational or demonstration contexts to illustrate basic X client-server interaction, window management, and event handling (specifically mouse motion events) within the X Window System. Its simplicity makes it an excellent visual aid for explaining these fundamental concepts.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>xeyes</I> was developed by Jeremy H. N. Smith and first appeared in the X Window System distribution. It dates back to the early days of X11, showcasing its capabilities for simple graphical client applications. It has since been maintained as part of the `x11-apps` or `xorg-apps` package in various Unix-like operating systems, remaining a perennial example of a basic, fun X client. Its enduring presence underscores the longevity and robustness of the X Window System itself.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>ximtoppm</b> [<i>ximfile</i>]<br>If <i>ximfile</i> is not specified, <i>ximtoppm</i> reads from standard input. The output PPM data is always written to standard output.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ximtoppm</i> is a specialized utility from the <i>Netpbm</i> image processing toolkit. Its primary function is to convert image files in the Xim (X Image Format), often used in X Window System environments, into the PPM (Portable Pixmap) format. The Xim format is a simple, uncompressed image file format. PPM is one of the three core formats (along with PBM for bitmaps and PGM for greymaps) of the <i>Netpbm</i> suite. The PPM format is widely used due to its simplicity and ease of conversion to numerous other popular image formats using other <i>Netpbm</i> tools. <i>ximtoppm</i> typically reads the Xim data from standard input if no input file is specified as an argument, and always writes the resulting PPM data to standard output. This adherence to the Unix philosophy makes it an ideal tool for integration into command-line pipelines for various image processing workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires the <i>Netpbm</i> package to be installed on the system.<br>The input file or stream must be a valid Xim format; <i>ximtoppm</i> does not perform error correction for malformed files.<br>This command is highly specialized for Xim to PPM conversion and offers no direct options for image manipulation (e.g., resizing, cropping, color adjustments). For such tasks, other <i>Netpbm</i> utilities or general image manipulation software should be used after conversion to PPM.


title: STANDARD I/O USAGE
content:
Like most <i>Netpbm</i> utilities, <i>ximtoppm</i> adheres to the Unix philosophy of filters. It can read input from a file specified as an argument or from standard input, and always writes its output to standard output. This allows it to be easily integrated into shell scripts and pipelines.<br><br><b>Examples:</b><br><br>Convert 'input.xim' to 'output.ppm':<br><b>ximtoppm</b> input.xim > output.ppm<br><br>Convert data from a pipe to 'output.ppm':<br>cat some_xim_data.xim | <b>ximtoppm</b> > output.ppm


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ximtoppm</i> is a component of the <i>Netpbm</i> project, which is a significant successor to the original <i>Pbmplus</i> package created by Jef Poskanzer in the late 1980s. The <i>Pbmplus</i> toolkit was designed to provide a flexible and portable set of tools for manipulating bitmap, greymap, and pixmap images on Unix-like systems. <i>Netpbm</i>, maintaining the Unix philosophy of small, specialized tools, continued and expanded this legacy, offering a vast array of converters and manipulators for various image formats. <i>ximtoppm</i> specifically addresses the conversion from X Window System's Xim format, reflecting the toolkit's historical roots in Unix graphical environments.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>The requested command "Xmark" does not appear to be a standard or widely recognized command-line utility in typical Linux distributions. It is not found in common manual pages (e.g., <code>man Xmark</code>) or core system utility sets. It is possible that "Xmark" refers to a typo, a highly specialized or custom-built script, an internal function of a specific application that is not directly exposed as a system command, or a component of a niche software package. Without further context, providing detailed information about its syntax, options, or typical usage is not possible. Users seeking information on a command with a similar name should verify the exact spelling or the specific software package it belongs to.</i>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>The primary caveat is that "Xmark" is not a standard Linux command. Therefore, any system or script attempting to use "Xmark" as a standalone command would likely result in a "command not found" error. Its functionality, if it exists in a specific context, would be entirely dependent on that custom implementation and not on a general Linux standard.</i>


title: COMMAND RECOGNITION
content:
<i>Users encountering 'Xmark' in documentation or scripts should be aware that it's likely a placeholder, a reference to a non-standard utility, or a misnomer for an actual command. It is recommended to verify the source or context in which 'Xmark' is mentioned to understand its intended purpose, if any.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>There is no documented history for a general "Xmark" command within standard Linux development or usage, as it does not exist as a widely adopted utility. Its origins, if any, would be specific to a private or highly specialized project.</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-w</b>, <b>--with-comments</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes comments in the canonical form. By default, comments are stripped according to C14N 1.0.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--strip-comments</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly strips comments from the output. This is the default behavior for standard C14N 1.0.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--exclusive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies Exclusive XML Canonicalization (Exc-C14N). This variant minimizes the namespace declarations by only including those that are strictly necessary for the current element and its ancestors.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--prefix-list LIST</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used only with <b>--exclusive</b>. Specifies a space-separated <i>LIST</i> of namespace prefixes to omit from the canonical form, even if they would otherwise be included by Exc-C14N rules.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><br>xml-canonic</i> is a command-line utility designed to perform <b>XML Canonicalization</b> on XML documents.<br>It reads XML from specified files or standard input, then writes the canonicalized output to standard output.<br>The primary purpose of XML canonicalization (C14N) is to bring an XML document into a standard, <I>deterministic physical representation</I>.<br>This ensures that two XML documents that are logically equivalent (e.g., differing only in whitespace, attribute order, or namespace declarations) will produce the exact same byte-for-byte output after canonicalization.<br>This property is crucial for applications such as <I>XML Digital Signatures</I>, where even minor, semantically insignificant changes would invalidate a signature.<br>It supports the standard <b>XML Canonicalization Version 1.0 (C14N)</b> and <b>Exclusive XML Canonicalization (Exc-C14N)</b>.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>xml-canonic</b> primarily implements XML Canonicalization Version 1.0 and Exclusive XML Canonicalization.<br>It does not support newer canonicalization algorithms like C14N 1.1.<br>It expects well-formed XML input and may behave unexpectedly or fail on malformed documents.<br>Complex DTD processing or external entity resolution might not be fully handled as per advanced XML parsers.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>xml-canonic</b> is part of the <i>xml-core</i> package, which provides essential command-line utilities for XML processing on Linux systems, particularly Debian-based distributions.<br>Its development is closely tied to the evolution and widespread adoption of XML Canonicalization specifications, crucial for security-related XML standards like XML Digital Signatures and XML Encryption.<br>While its core functionality remains stable, the underlying libraries and package maintenance ensure its compatibility with modern XML standards and system environments.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<B>xml-transform</B> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] <I>&lt;INPUT_XML_FILE&gt;</I> <I>&lt;XSL_STYLESHEET_FILE&gt;</I> [<I>&lt;OUTPUT_FILE&gt;</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>&lt;INPUT_XML_FILE&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The <I>path</I> to the XML document to be transformed.<br><br><b><I>&lt;XSL_STYLESHEET_FILE&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The <I>path</I> to the XSLT stylesheet to apply.<br><br><b><I>&lt;OUTPUT_FILE&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(<I>Optional</I>) The path where the transformed output will be saved. If omitted, output typically goes to <B>standard output</B> (<I>stdout</I>).<br><br><b><B>-s</B>, <B>--stylesheet</B> <I>&lt;FILE&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the XSLT stylesheet file (<I>alternative to positional argument</I>).<br><br><b><B>-i</B>, <B>--input</B> <I>&lt;FILE&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input XML file (<I>alternative to positional argument</I>).<br><br><b><B>-o</B>, <B>--output</B> <I>&lt;FILE&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output file (<I>alternative to positional argument</I>).<br><br><b><B>-p</B>, <B>--param</B> <I>&lt;NAME&gt;=&lt;VALUE&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes a <I>parameter</I> to the XSLT stylesheet, often used to customize transformation behavior.<br><br><b><B>-v</B>, <B>--verbose</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables <I>verbose output</I>, showing more details about the transformation process, useful for debugging.<br><br><b><B>-h</B>, <B>--help</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a <I>help message</I> and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>xml-transform</B> command is commonly found as a <I>wrapper script</I> that simplifies the process of transforming XML documents using <B>XSLT</B> (Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations). While not a standard command included in most base Linux distributions, it often acts as a convenient front-end to more powerful and widely available XSLT processors like <B>xsltproc</B> (from libxslt) or <B>xmlstarlet</B>.<br><br>Its primary function is to apply an XSLT stylesheet to an input XML file, producing a new XML document or another text-based format (e.g., HTML, plain text) as output. This utility streamlines the command-line execution of XSLT, abstracting away some of the complexities of the underlying processor's options and arguments, making it easier for users to perform common transformation tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
xml-transform is <B>not a standard Linux command</B> universally available across all distributions. It is typically a <I>custom script</I> or part of a specific package (e.g., DocBook tools) that acts as a simplified wrapper for underlying XSLT processors like <B>xsltproc</B> or <B>xmlstarlet</B>.<br><br>Its exact behavior, available options, and installation method can vary significantly depending on the system or specific package providing it.<br><br>For robust and cross-platform XML transformations, it is generally recommended to use the underlying tools directly, such as <B>xsltproc(1)</B> for XSLT 1.0 or <B>xmlstarlet(1)</B> for more comprehensive XML operations, which offer more control and consistent behavior.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
<I>xml-transform</I> is primarily used for tasks such as <B>converting XML to HTML</B> for web display, restructuring XML data, filtering specific XML elements, or generating text reports from XML sources. It's especially useful in <I>automated build processes</I> or <I>content management workflows</I>.


title: UNDERLYING TECHNOLOGIES
content:
The effectiveness of <I>xml-transform</I> relies heavily on the capabilities of the underlying XSLT processor. Most commonly, it utilizes <B>XSLT 1.0</B> features through <B>xsltproc</B>. For more advanced features like <B>XSLT 2.0</B> or <B>3.0</B>, users would typically need to employ processors like <I>Saxon/Java</I> directly.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of a simplified <I>xml-transform</I> script emerged as a <B>convenience wrapper</B>, particularly in environments where complex command-line arguments for XSLT processors were common or when integrating into larger build systems (e.g., DocBook processing pipelines). These scripts often served to provide a consistent, simpler interface over tools like <B>xsltproc</B> or <B>xalan</B>, abstracting away details and allowing users to focus on the input, stylesheet, and output files. While not an official GNU project, such wrappers gained popularity for their ease of use in specific toolchains.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows version information about the utility and exits.<br><br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>FILE</i>, <b>--output</b>=<i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the unescaped output to the specified <i>FILE</i> instead of standard output (stdout).<br><br><br><b><b>--input-encoding</b>=<i>ENCODING</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the character encoding of the input data. This helps in correctly interpreting multi-byte characters and entity references.<br><br><br><b><b>--output-encoding</b>=<i>ENCODING</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the character encoding for the output data. The output will be transcoded to this encoding if different from the input.<br><br><br><b><b>--strict</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables strict parsing mode. The command will exit with an error if it encounters malformed or unrecognized XML entities, instead of attempting to ignore or fix them.<br><br><br><b><i>FILE...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more input files to be processed. If no files are specified, the command reads from standard input (stdin).<br><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The concept of <i>xml-unescape</i> refers to the process of converting XML character entity references (like <b>&amp;lt;</b> for <b>&lt;</b>, <b>&amp;amp;</b> for <b>&amp;</b>, <b>&amp;#DD;</b> for decimal character codes, or <b>&amp;#xHH;</b> for hexadecimal character codes) back into their original, literal character forms. This operation is crucial when XML content has been embedded within other XML elements or plain text in an escaped format to avoid conflicts with XML's structural markup.<br><br>The primary purpose is to make the content human-readable or machine-parseable in its original form. For example, if an XML document contains data like <i>"This is &amp;lt;XML&amp;gt; content"</i>, unescaping it would result in <i>"This is <XML> content"</i>. This command, if it were a standalone utility, would typically read input from a file or standard input, perform the unescaping, and write the resulting unescaped content to standard output or a specified file.


title: CAVEATS
content:
It is important to note that <i>xml-unescape</i> is <b>not a standard, universally available standalone command</b> on most Linux distributions. The functionality described typically refers to a common operation that needs to be performed on XML data. Users usually achieve this through more comprehensive XML processing toolkits like <b>xmlstarlet</b>, by using text manipulation utilities such as <b>sed</b> or <b>perl</b> with regular expressions for simpler cases, or by scripting in languages like <b>Python</b> or <b>Perl</b> which provide robust XML parsing libraries (e.g., <b>lxml</b> in Python, <b>XML::LibXML</b> in Perl). Therefore, direct invocation of 'xml-unescape' might not work without a specific package or custom script providing it.


title: COMMON XML ENTITIES
content:
The most frequently unescaped XML entities include:<br>- <b>&amp;lt;</b> converts to <b>&lt;</b> (less than sign)<br>- <b>&amp;gt;</b> converts to <b>&gt;</b> (greater than sign)<br>- <b>&amp;amp;</b> converts to <b>&amp;</b> (ampersand)<br>- <b>&amp;quot;</b> converts to <b>&quot;</b> (double quotation mark)<br>- <b>&amp;apos;</b> converts to <b>&apos;</b> (apostrophe or single quotation mark)<br>- <b>&amp;#DD;</b> converts to the character represented by the decimal number DD (e.g., <b>&amp;#32;</b> for space)<br>- <b>&amp;#xHH;</b> converts to the character represented by the hexadecimal number HH (e.g., <b>&amp;#x20;</b> for space)


title: USE CASES
content:
XML unescaping is typically performed when:<br>- Extracting plain text content from an XML document that might contain escaped characters.<br>- Preparing XML data for display in environments (like web browsers or text editors) that are not XML-aware and expect literal characters.<br>- Processing data that was stored in an XML-escaped format (e.g., in a database field) and needs to be returned to its original form for further processing or analysis.<br>- When debugging or inspecting raw XML content that uses extensive escaping for readability.


title: HISTORY
content:
The necessity for XML unescaping dates back to the very inception of XML itself. XML mandates that certain characters (like <b><</b>, <b>></b>, <b>&</b>, <b>"</b>, <b>'</b>) be escaped when they appear within element content or attribute values to avoid conflicts with the document's markup structure. As XML usage grew, the need for tools to reverse this escaping process became apparent, particularly for extracting or displaying plain text content. While dedicated <i>xml-unescape</i> commands are rare, the functionality has been integrated into numerous XML parsers, validators, and command-line processing utilities as a fundamental capability, reflecting a continuous need for clean content extraction from XML.<br>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-o <i>file</i>, --output <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output file. If omitted, the transformation result is written to standard output.<br><br><b>--stringparam <i>name</i> <i>value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes a string parameter with the given <I>name</I> and <I>value</I> to the stylesheet.<br><br><b>--param <i>name</i> <i>value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes an XPath expression result as a parameter to the stylesheet. The <I>value</I> is evaluated as an XPath expression.<br><br><b>--nonet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables network access for fetching DTDs, external entities, or remote stylesheets, enhancing security.<br><br><b>--novalid</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables DTD validation of the input XML document. This can speed up processing if validation is not required.<br><br><b>--xinclude</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Processes XInclude elements in the input XML document before transformation.<br><br><b>--html</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats the input document as HTML, attempting to parse it as such before applying the XSLT stylesheet.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version number of <b>xsltproc</b> and the underlying <I>libxslt</I> and <I>libxml2</I> libraries.<br><br><b>--timing</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the time taken for various stages of processing, including parsing and transformation.<br><br><b>--maxdepth <i>depth</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum template recursion depth to prevent infinite loops, with a default usually around 250.<br><br><b>--encoding <i>encoding</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the encoding for the output document, overriding any encoding specified in the stylesheet.<br><br><b>--path <i>path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a directory <I>path</I> to the search list for stylesheets, DTDs, or other external resources.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>xsltproc</b> is a command-line tool that applies XSLT (Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations) stylesheets to XML documents. It is an integral part of the <I>libxslt</I> library, which is built on top of <I>libxml2</I>.<br><br>Its primary function is to transform XML input into various output formats, such as HTML, plain text, or other XML structures, based on the rules defined in an XSLT stylesheet. <b>xsltproc</b> is widely used in scripting environments and automated workflows for document generation, data conversion, and content manipulation. While it primarily supports XSLT 1.0, it also includes support for many EXSLT extensions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>xsltproc</b> primarily implements the <I>XSLT 1.0</I> specification. It does not support <I>XSLT 2.0</I> or <I>XSLT 3.0</I> features, which offer more advanced data types, schema awareness, and powerful new functions. For these, consider alternatives like Saxon.<br><br>Processing very large XML documents or complex stylesheets can consume significant memory and CPU resources. It's advisable to test performance with typical datasets.<br><br>By default, <b>xsltproc</b> can fetch external resources (like DTDs, entities, or imported stylesheets) over the network. For security-sensitive environments, always use the <B>--nonet</B> option to prevent unintended network access or potential exploits.


title: XSLT 1.0 AND EXSLT SUPPORT
content:
<b>xsltproc</b> is designed to fully support the XSLT 1.0 specification and includes robust support for common EXSLT extensions (e.g., <I>str</I>, <I>math</I>, <I>common</I>, <I>sets</I>, <I>dates-and-times</I>), which provide additional functions not found in the core XSLT 1.0 standard.


title: STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT
content:
When no input XML document is specified, <b>xsltproc</b> reads from standard input (<I>stdin</I>), allowing for piping XML data directly to it from other commands. Similarly, if no output file is specified, the transformed result is written to standard output (<I>stdout</I>), making it easily usable in shell pipelines for further processing.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>xsltproc</b> is an integral part of the <I>libxslt</I> project, which itself is built upon the <I>libxml2</I> XML parsing library. Both <I>libxml2</I> and <I>libxslt</I> were initiated by Daniel Veillard in the late 1990s as open-source, C-based libraries to provide robust and fast XML and XSLT processing capabilities. <b>xsltproc</b> emerged as the command-line interface to <I>libxslt</I>, making its powerful features accessible directly from the shell, thus becoming a staple in Unix-like environments for automated XML transformations. Its development has focused on performance and standards compliance within the <I>XSLT 1.0</I> paradigm.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>yapf</b> [<i>options</i>] &lt;<i>file or directory ...</i>&gt;<br><b>yapf</b> --style-help<br><b>yapf</b> --list-style-types


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b>, <b>--in-place</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Edit files in place. The original files are modified directly.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--diff</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print a diff of the changes that would be made to the files, without modifying them.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--recursive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recursively format files in the specified directories. It processes all Python files found within.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--parallel</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run <i>yapf</i> in parallel using multiple processes, speeding up formatting for many files.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--style</b> &lt;<i>style</i>&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a built-in style (e.g., <i>pep8</i>, <i>google</i>, <i>facebook</i>, <i>chromium</i>) or a path to a style definition file. The default is 'pep8'.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print verbose messages, showing more details about the formatting process.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's version number and exit.<br><br><b><b>--list-style-types</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all the supported built-in style types that can be used with the <b>--style</b> option.<br><br><b><b>--disable-smart-backticks</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not attempt to reformat backticks. This is useful for older Python 2 codebases.<br><br><b><b>--no-local-style</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not look for <i>.style.yapf</i> or <i>setup.cfg</i> files for style configuration. Only applies command-line or default styles.<br><br><b><b>--style-help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show detailed documentation about the available style options and their effects, then exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>yapf</i>, which stands for <b>Yet Another Python Formatter</b>, is a powerful tool developed by Google for automatically reformatting Python code. Its primary purpose is to ensure code conforms to the PEP 8 style guide, thereby enhancing readability and maintaining consistency across a codebase.<br><br>Unlike some other formatters, <i>yapf</i> is designed to be "uncompromising." This means it applies a single, opinionated formatting to a given piece of code, aiming to eliminate subjective style debates during code reviews. It can process individual files, entire directories recursively, or accept input directly from standard input. <i>yapf</i> supports various configuration options, allowing users to select predefined styles (like Google or Chromium) or define custom ones through command-line flags or dedicated configuration files. Its overarching goal is to streamline collaboration and reduce cognitive load by ensuring a uniform and aesthetically pleasing code style.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <i>yapf</i> is highly effective, its "uncompromising" nature means it imposes a strict style that might not always align perfectly with every niche team preference, even if it adheres to PEP 8.<br><br>First-time application to a large, unformatted codebase can result in very significant changes, leading to large Git diffs. It's often recommended to apply it as a single, dedicated commit to avoid mixing formatting changes with functional ones.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<i>yapf</i> can be configured using a <i>.style.yapf</i> file placed in the project's root directory, or within a <i>[yapf]</i> section in <i>pyproject.toml</i> or <i>setup.cfg</i>. These files allow project-specific style settings to be defined and shared among team members, ensuring consistent formatting without needing to specify command-line arguments every time.


title: EDITOR AND CI/CD INTEGRATION
content:
To maintain continuous code quality, <i>yapf</i> is often integrated directly into development workflows. This includes integration with popular Integrated Development Environments (IDEs) like VS Code and PyCharm, where it can automatically format code on save. It's also a common practice to include <i>yapf</i> as part of Git pre-commit hooks or Continuous Integration/Continuous Delivery (CI/CD) pipelines to automatically enforce code style checks before code is merged or deployed.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>yapf</i> was developed by Google and first released around 2015-2016. Its creation stemmed from the desire to standardize Python code formatting within Google and to address the inefficiencies of manual style adherence or subjective code reviews. The core philosophy behind <i>yapf</i> was to be "uncompromising," meaning for any given piece of code, there should ideally be only one correct way to format it. This approach aimed to eliminate endless debates over stylistic preferences, allowing developers to focus on the logic and functionality of their code.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<br><b>yum</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>command</i>] [<i>package ...</i>]<br><b>yum</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>group or environment</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-y</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically answer yes to all prompts, useful for scripting.<br><br><b><b>install</b> <i>package(s)</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Installs one or more specified packages, automatically resolving and installing dependencies.<br><br><b><b>update</b> [<i>package(s)</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Updates specified packages to their latest available version, or updates all packages if none are specified.<br><br><b><b>remove</b> <i>package(s)</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes one or more packages from the system, including dependencies that are no longer needed.<br><br><b><b>search</b> <i>keyword(s)</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Searches for packages that match the given keywords in their name, summary, or description.<br><br><b><b>info</b> <i>package(s)</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information about specified packages, such as version, size, description, and repository.<br><br><b><b>list</b> [<i>available|installed|updates|package-name</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists packages based on various criteria, e.g., all available, currently installed, or those with updates.<br><br><b><b>check-update</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks for available package updates without performing any installations or downloads.<br><br><b><b>clean</b> [<i>all|packages|metadata|headers|dbcache</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Cleans various <i>yum</i> caches (e.g., downloaded packages, repository metadata) to free up disk space.<br><br><b><b>repolist</b> [<i>all|enabled|disabled</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a list of configured software repositories, showing their status (enabled/disabled) and number of packages.<br><br><b><b>provides</b> <i>filename</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Finds which package provides a specific file or capability.<br><br><b><b>history</b> [<i>info|list|undo|redo</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Views or manages the transaction history of <i>yum</i> operations, allowing for rollbacks or re-application of changes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>yum</i> (Yellowdog Updater, Modified) is a command-line utility for package management on RPM-based Linux distributions, such as CentOS, Fedora (older versions), and Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL). Its primary function is to automate the process of installing, updating, removing, and managing software packages, along with their dependencies, from configured software repositories. <i>yum</i> simplifies system administration by handling complex dependency resolution, ensuring that all necessary libraries and components are installed when a new application is added or updated. It fetches packages from remote repositories, which are collections of software, making it easy for users to keep their systems up-to-date and secure. Although largely superseded by <i>dnf</i> in modern distributions, <i>yum</i> remains a fundamental tool for many legacy systems and often acts as an alias for <i>dnf</i> on newer installations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>yum</i> has largely been superseded by <i>dnf</i> in recent Fedora, CentOS Stream, and RHEL versions, primarily due to <i>dnf</i>'s improved performance, better dependency resolution, and modernized codebase. While the <i>yum</i> command is still present on many newer systems (often acting as an alias to <i>dnf</i> for compatibility), its direct development has mostly ceased. Older <i>yum</i> versions can sometimes be slower and less efficient than <i>dnf</i> for large-scale operations or complex dependency scenarios. Dependency issues, though generally handled well, can occasionally lead to 'dependency hell' in poorly managed systems.


title: <I>REPOSITORIES</I>
content:
<i>yum</i> relies on software repositories, which are network locations or local directories containing packages and metadata (information about packages). These repositories are configured via files in the <i>/etc/yum.repos.d/</i> directory, typically ending with a <i>.repo</i> extension. Each <i>.repo</i> file defines one or more repositories, specifying their URL, GPG key for verification (to ensure package authenticity), and whether they are enabled. <i>yum</i> uses this configuration to locate, download, and verify packages, ensuring software is obtained from trusted sources.


title: <I>CONFIGURATION</I>
content:
The main configuration file for <i>yum</i> is <i>/etc/yum.conf</i>. This file contains global settings such as the default root directory for packages, caching options, GPG check settings, and plugin configurations that apply to all <i>yum</i> operations. Individual repository settings, which define specific package sources, are typically managed in separate <i>.repo</i> files within the <i>/etc/yum.repos.d/</i> directory, allowing for modular and granular control over which repositories <i>yum</i> uses for package operations.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>yum</i> was originally developed by Duke University in 2003, evolving from the Yellowdog Updater (YUP) tool used by Yellow Dog Linux. It quickly gained popularity for its robust ability to handle package dependencies and became the standard package manager for Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Fedora (until <i>dnf</i>), and CentOS. Its development aimed to provide a user-friendly and reliable interface over the low-level <i>rpm</i> utility. While revolutionary in its time, <i>yum</i> began showing its age, particularly in performance and advanced dependency resolution, leading to the development of <i>dnf</i> (Dandified Yum), which became the default package manager for Fedora 18+ and RHEL 8+, effectively taking over <i>yum</i>'s role while retaining a similar command-line syntax.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
zek [options] [arguments] <br> <i>(This syntax is illustrative, as the actual command 'zek' does not have a defined standard usage or documented options.)</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>N/A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;No standard parameters are documented for the 'zek' command as it is not a recognized Linux utility. Any options or arguments would be specific to a custom implementation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <b><i>'zek'</i></b> does not appear to be a standard utility or a widely recognized command within common Linux distributions. Extensive searches of official documentation, manual pages, and common repositories reveal no direct information about a command named 'zek' with a defined purpose or set of functionalities. Consequently, a detailed analysis regarding its specific usage, options, or typical behavior cannot be accurately provided. It is highly probable that 'zek' is either a typo in the command name, a custom alias or shell function defined by a user or system administrator on a particular machine, or a component of a highly specialized, niche software application not commonly distributed or documented. Users encountering 'zek' should investigate their local system's configuration or the specific software context from which the command originates.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command 'zek' is not found in standard Linux command lists or man pages across typical distributions. Attempting to execute 'zek' on a general Linux system will most likely result in a 'command not found' error. If 'zek' functions on your system, it is either a custom script, a locally defined alias, or part of a very specific, non-standard software installation. Exercise caution if you encounter an undocumented 'zek' command, as its origin and function are unknown.


title: VERIFYING COMMAND EXISTENCE
content:
To determine if 'zek' exists on your specific Linux system, you can use commands such as: <br><b>'which zek'</b> - Checks if the command is in your PATH. <br><b>'type zek'</b> - Indicates if 'zek' is an alias, function, or executable. <br><b>'man zek'</b> - Attempts to open the manual page for 'zek'.<br>If these commands yield no output or indicate 'not found', then 'zek' is not a recognized command on your system.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is no documented history of 'zek' as a standard or commonly adopted Linux command. Its development and usage are not recorded in common open-source or commercial Linux contexts, suggesting it is not part of the core GNU/Linux utilities or a widely used application.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-b</b> <i>source</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Backward-compatible source parsing</i>.<br>Parses input files in a backward-compatible manner, primarily for older tzdata formats.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>directory</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify output directory</i>.<br>Writes the compiled time zone data files to the specified <i>directory</i> instead of the default system location (e.g., <i>/usr/share/zoneinfo</i>).<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>linkname</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Create a link</i>.<br>Creates a symbolic link named <i>linkname</i> in the output directory, pointing to the time zone specified in the input file. Useful for creating aliases.<br><br><b><b>-L</b> <i>leapsecondfilename</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Leap second information file</i>.<br>Specifies an additional file containing leap second rules to be incorporated into the compiled time zone data.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>timezone</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify POSIX TZ string</i>.<br>Specifies the POSIX <i>TZ</i> environment variable string for a given <i>timezone</i>, which can be useful for system-wide defaults or specific zone configurations.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>@offset</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Reference year (obsolete)</i>.<br>Specifies a reference year for offset calculations. This option is largely obsolete and rarely used.<br><br><b><b>-R</b> <i>@offset</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Reference year with rule data (obsolete)</i>.<br>Similar to <b>-r</b>, but also considers rule data. Also largely obsolete.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Limit timestamp range</i>.<br>Limits the range of timestamps generated by the compiler, potentially reducing file size for zones with very distant (pre-1970 or post-2037) rules.<br><br><b><b>-S</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Strict limit timestamp range</i>.<br>Similar to <b>-s</b>, but performs more stringent checks and may issue warnings if rules extend too far into the past or future, indicating potential issues with time representation.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>filename</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify type check file (internal)</i>.<br>Specifies a file for internal type checks, typically used during development or testing.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Verbose output</i>.<br>Produces more detailed output during the compilation process, showing which zones are being processed and any warnings or errors encountered.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Print version information</i>.<br>Displays the version of the <b>zic</b> utility.<br><br><b><b>-y</b> <i>yearistype</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify year type (internal)</i>.<br>Specifies a <i>yearistype</i> value, used for internal purposes during compilation.<br><br><b><b>--disable-systemtzdata</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Disable inclusion of system time zone data</i>.<br>Prevents <b>zic</b> from including pre-existing system time zone data in its compilation, useful for custom or isolated builds.<br><br><b><b>--eta-leap</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Enable ETA leap second handling</i>.<br>Enables experimental Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) leap second handling, which is typically for specific or advanced use cases.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Print help message</i>.<br>Displays a summary of command-line options and usage information for <b>zic</b>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>zic</b> command (Time Zone Compiler) is a crucial utility in Linux systems responsible for converting human-readable time zone definitions into a compact, machine-readable binary format. It processes source files containing rules for time zones, including standard time offsets, daylight saving time (DST) transitions, and historical changes.<br><br>The compiled output files, typically stored in <i>/usr/share/zoneinfo</i> (or a specified directory), are then used by system libraries (like <i>libc</i>) and functions (e.g., <i>localtime(3)</i>) to correctly determine local time, apply DST adjustments, and handle historical time changes based on the configured time zone. This ensures that applications and services on the system can accurately represent timestamps across different geographical regions and historical periods.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The accuracy of time functions like <i>localtime(3)</i> relies on correctly compiled time zone data. If time zone rules change (e.g., due to government decisions on DST), the <b>zic</b> command must be rerun with updated source files to ensure the system reflects the latest rules.<br><br>The <i>TZ</i> environment variable can override the system's default time zone setting, potentially leading to inconsistencies if not managed carefully. The compiled data might not accurately represent extremely old or future dates if the source data or compilation options (like <b>-s</b>) limit the historical range.


title: INPUT FILE FORMAT
content:
<b>zic</b> reads time zone definitions from source files, typically found within the tzdata distribution. These files follow a specific format, primarily containing four types of lines that define the time zone rules:<br><br><b><i>Zone lines:</i></b> These define a specific time zone, including its name (e.g., "Europe/London"), the standard offset from UTC, and the set of rules (often referring to a Rule line) that govern daylight saving time transitions for that zone.<br><br><b><i>Rule lines:</i></b> These specify the rules for daylight saving time (DST) adjustments. They define when DST starts and ends, the amount of time to adjust (e.g., +1 hour), and the abbreviation to use for the time zone during that period.<br><br><b><i>Link lines:</i></b> These create aliases or symbolic links for existing time zones. For instance, a Link line might make "America/New_York" an alias for "America/Nipigon" if they share the same rules, or provide backward compatibility names.<br><br><b><i>Check lines:</i></b> These are used for internal consistency checks within the source data, helping maintain the integrity and accuracy of the time zone database.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>zic</b> command is an integral part of the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) Time Zone Database, often referred to as the Olson database. This database, initiated by Arthur David Olson, provides a comprehensive collection of worldwide time zone rules and historical data. <b>zic</b> was developed to compile this human-readable data into the binary format used by most Unix-like operating systems. Its existence allows operating systems to provide accurate time zone information globally and handle complex historical changes, making it a cornerstone for consistent timekeeping on computing systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>&lt;zip_file(s)&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more paths to the password-protected ZIP archive files from which to extract hashes. This is a mandatory argument.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> &lt;<i>file</i>&gt;, <b>--output-file</b>=&lt;<i>file</i>&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the extracted hash(es) to the specified file instead of printing them to standard output (stdout).<br><br><b><b>-m</b> &lt;<i>mode</i>&gt;, <b>--mode</b>=&lt;<i>mode</i>&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the encryption mode for hash extraction. Useful if auto-detection fails or for specific analysis. Common modes include <i>pkzip</i> (traditional) and <i>zip-aes</i>.<br><br><b><b>--keep-data</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instructs <i>zip2john</i> to also include the encrypted data (ciphertext) in the hash output. While this makes the hash string longer, it can sometimes provide more context for faster cracking with certain JtR attack modes.<br><br><b><b>--single-file-mode</b>=&lt;<i>file_in_zip</i>&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts the hash specifically for a single file located <i>inside</i> the ZIP archive, rather than the entire archive's password. This is useful for large archives where only a particular component is of interest.<br><br><b><b>--stdout</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces output to standard output, even if a specific output file is generally expected or an internal redirection is considered.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<br><i>zip2john</i> is an essential utility from the acclaimed John the Ripper (JtR) password cracking suite. Its primary purpose is to process password-protected ZIP archives and extract the encryption hash in a format compatible with <i>John the Ripper</i>. This extracted hash can then be used by JtR to perform dictionary attacks, brute-force attacks, or other advanced cracking techniques to recover the original password.<br><br>The tool supports various ZIP encryption methods, including traditional PKZIP encryption (which is known to be weaker) and the more robust AES encryption. By converting the proprietary ZIP encryption into a standardized hash format, <i>zip2john</i> bridges the gap between encrypted archives and powerful password auditing tools, making it invaluable for security professionals, penetration testers, and system administrators tasked with auditing password strength or recovering lost access to archived data.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><i>zip2john</i> only extracts the hash; it does not crack the password itself. A separate tool like <i>John the Ripper</i> is required for password cracking.</li><li>The effectiveness of cracking depends heavily on the complexity of the password and the resources (CPU, GPU, wordlists) available. AES-encrypted ZIP files are significantly harder to crack than traditional PKZIP encrypted ones.</li><li>The ZIP archive must be password-protected for <i>zip2john</i> to extract a meaningful hash.</li></ul>


title: TYPICAL USAGE
content:
The most common usage involves redirecting the output to a file that <i>John the Ripper</i> can then use:<br><br><b>zip2john my_encrypted.zip &gt; zip_hash.txt</b><br><br>Then, you would use <i>John the Ripper</i> to attempt to crack the password:<br><br><b>john zip_hash.txt</b>


title: OUTPUT FORMAT
content:
The hash output by <i>zip2john</i> is typically a long string designed specifically for JtR. It includes metadata about the encryption type, checksums, and encrypted data chunks. For example, a traditional PKZIP hash might look like:<br><br><b>my_encrypted.zip:$pkzip$1*1*2*0*1*f71*...</b><br><br>While an AES-encrypted hash would be:<br><br><b>my_encrypted.zip:$zip2john$1*1*1*0*1*...</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zip2john</i> is an integral part of the John the Ripper (JtR) password cracker suite, which was initially developed by Solar Designer in the mid-1990s. As encrypted ZIP archives became a common method for data protection, <i>zip2john</i> was developed to extend JtR's capabilities to these files. Over time, it has evolved to support newer and stronger encryption methods used in ZIP files, such as AES, ensuring JtR remains a versatile tool for password auditing and recovery across various file formats.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zipalign</b> [-f] [-v] &lt;alignment&gt; &lt;infile.apk&gt; &lt;outfile.apk&gt;<br><b>zipalign</b> -c [-v] &lt;alignment&gt; &lt;infile.apk&gt;


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force overwrite existing <i>&lt;outfile.apk&gt;</i> without prompting.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output, showing more details about the alignment process.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Check alignment only. This option performs a check to verify if the <i>&lt;infile.apk&gt;</i> is already aligned correctly. No output file is generated.<br><br><b>&lt;alignment&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A positive integer representing the byte alignment, typically <b>4</b>. This ensures that uncompressed data starts at an offset that is a multiple of this value within the APK. For 32-bit systems, 4-byte alignment is standard.<br><br><b>&lt;infile.apk&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the input unaligned Android Package (APK) file.<br><br><b>&lt;outfile.apk&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path where the aligned Android Package (APK) file will be saved. This parameter is ignored when using the <i>-c</i> (check) option.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>zipalign</b> command is an archive alignment tool provided as part of the Android SDK Build Tools. Its primary function is to optimize Android Package (APK) files by ensuring that all uncompressed data within the archive, such as image and audio files, starts at a specific byte alignment relative to the beginning of the file. This alignment allows the Android system to directly memory-map the APK file, eliminating the need to copy data from the archive into RAM at runtime. The result is a significant reduction in RAM consumption for the application, faster loading times, and overall improved performance on Android devices.<br><br>Typically, <b>zipalign</b> is applied as a final optimization step before an APK is distributed. While modern Android signing tools like <i>apksigner</i> automatically incorporate this alignment, developers using older signing methods (like <i>jarsigner</i>) or custom build processes must manually run <b>zipalign</b>. It is crucial to run <b>zipalign</b> *before* signing an APK with <i>jarsigner</i>, as running it after would invalidate the digital signature.


title: CAVEATS
content:
If you are using the modern <i>apksigner</i> tool (Android SDK Build-Tools 24.0.3 and higher), <b>zipalign</b> is automatically performed as part of the signing process. Manually running it before <i>apksigner</i> is redundant.<br><br>If you are using the older <i>jarsigner</i> tool to sign your APK, it is absolutely critical to run <b>zipalign</b> *before* signing the APK. Running <b>zipalign</b> after <i>jarsigner</i> will invalidate the digital signature, making the APK untrustworthy and un-installable.<br><br>The most common and recommended <i>&lt;alignment&gt;</i> value is <b>4</b> (for 4-byte alignment), as it aligns with typical 32-bit memory access patterns on Android devices. Using an incorrect alignment value can lead to unexpected behavior or no performance benefits.


title: WHY 4-BYTE ALIGNMENT?
content:
The standard 4-byte alignment is chosen because it matches the typical word size (32-bit) of ARM processors commonly used in Android devices. Ensuring that uncompressed data (like images and audio) starts at a memory address that is a multiple of 4 bytes allows the operating system and hardware to directly memory-map these files. This direct mapping avoids the need for copying data into a separate buffer in RAM, thereby reducing memory consumption and improving I/O performance as the data can be accessed directly from the APK file itself.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>zipalign</b> has been a core utility within the Android SDK Build Tools since early versions. It was developed by Google to address performance and memory efficiency challenges on Android devices, particularly concerning how resources are accessed within APK files. Initially, developers had to manually incorporate <b>zipalign</b> into their build pipelines. However, with the evolution of Android's build system and signing tools, especially the introduction of <i>apksigner</i>, the execution of <b>zipalign</b> has become largely automated and integrated into the standard signing workflow, simplifying the process for developers while maintaining the crucial optimization benefits.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>-d</b><br><i>Decrypts</i> the entries in the specified <i>zipfile</i>, removing any existing password protection.<br><br><b>-b</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>-b</b><br>Performs a binary operation; useful on systems where text files might be altered by default.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>-q</b><br><i>Quiet mode</i>; suppresses most messages and prompts, except for password entry.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>-v</b><br><i>Verbose mode</i>; displays more information about the operation being performed.<br><br><b>zipfile</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>zipfile</b><br>The path to the <i>.zip</i> archive to be modified. This argument is mandatory.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
zipcloak is a utility from the Info-ZIP project designed to add, change, or remove password protection for entries within an existing <i>.zip</i> archive. Unlike creating a new encrypted archive from scratch, zipcloak modifies the specified <i>zipfile</i> directly, prompting the user for a password to either encrypt the contents or decrypt them.<br><br>It is particularly useful when you need to secure specific data inside an archive without recreating the entire file. When encrypting, it applies a password to the data streams of the archive's entries. When decrypting, it removes this protection, making the entries accessible without a password. The command supports both the traditional weak PKZIP 2.0 compatible encryption and, if the underlying <i>zip</i> library was compiled with it, stronger AES-256 encryption. This tool is a convenient way to manage the security of your archived data post-creation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>In-Place Modification:</b> zipcloak modifies the archive in place. It is highly recommended to create a backup of your <i>.zip</i> file before using zipcloak to prevent accidental data loss or corruption.<br><br><b>Encryption Strength:</b> By default, zipcloak may use the weak PKZIP 2.0 compatible encryption, which is known to be vulnerable. If the underlying <i>zip</i> utility supports it, AES-256 encryption might be used, but this depends on the compilation options of the <i>zip</i> library.<br><br><b>Compatibility:</b> Archives encrypted with AES-256 using modern zipcloak/zip might not be compatible with older <i>unzip</i> versions or other zip programs that do not support AES encryption.<br><br><b>Filename Protection:</b> zipcloak only encrypts the file <i>contents</i>, not the filenames or other metadata within the archive. These remain visible even if the contents are encrypted.


title: PASSWORD PROMPTS
content:
zipcloak will interactively prompt for a password. When encrypting, it will ask for the new password twice for confirmation. When decrypting, it will ask for the existing password. For silent operations, consider piping the password, though this is generally less secure and not directly supported via a command-line option for password input.


title: ERROR HANDLING
content:
If an invalid password is provided during decryption, zipcloak will fail to decrypt the entries. If the archive is corrupt or unreadable, the command will also report an error.


title: HISTORY
content:
zipcloak is an integral part of the Info-ZIP suite of tools, which originated in the early 1990s as a portable, open-source alternative to commercial PKZIP utilities. It evolved alongside the core <i>zip</i> and <i>unzip</i> commands, providing the crucial functionality of securing archived data without the need to re-compress files. Its development mirrored the progression of encryption standards within the ZIP format, initially supporting the weaker, widely compatible PKZIP 2.0 encryption. More recently, with the advent of stronger algorithms like AES-256 being incorporated into the underlying <i>zip</i> libraries, zipcloak has also gained the capability to utilize these stronger methods, provided the system's <i>zip</i> was compiled with the necessary support. Its continued usage highlights the ongoing need for secure, on-the-fly modification of archive security.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show verbose output, including more detailed information about structures.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the contents of specific structures within the ZIP file.<br><br><b>-l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the exact byte location (offset) of structures within the ZIP file.<br><br><b>-e</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the contents of extra fields associated with file entries and central directory records.<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the uncompressed contents of file entries. Be cautious with large files as it prints to stdout.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the contents of password-protected entries. The command will prompt for the password interactively.<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempt to decrypt contents if they are encrypted. This requires the <i>Crypt::Zip</i> Perl module and the correct password.<br><br><b>-P <i>password</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide the password on the command line. Note that this is less secure as the password may be visible in process listings.<br><br><b>-z</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not verify the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) of uncompressed data. Useful for inspecting malformed archives.<br><br><b>-o <i>offset</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Start reading the ZIP file from a specific byte offset. Useful for embedded ZIP archives or concatenated files.<br><br><b>-L</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all possible command-line options and their descriptions, then exit.<br><br><b>-m <i>num</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a maximum of <i>num</i> bytes when displaying data or content, preventing excessive output for large sections.<br><br><b>-x <i>structure_type,...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude specified structure types from the output. Possible types include <i>local</i>, <i>cdir</i>, <i>eocd</i>, <i>data</i>, <i>info</i>, <i>all</i>, <i>name</i>, <i>extra</i>, <i>comment</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zipdetails</i> is a powerful Perl script designed to meticulously display the internal structure of a ZIP file. Unlike simpler tools like <i>unzip -v</i> that provide a high-level list of files, <i>zipdetails</i> delves deep into the various low-level headers and records that constitute a ZIP archive. It can reveal details about the local file headers (which precede each compressed file entry), the central directory (a comprehensive index of all files, typically found at the end of the archive), and the end of central directory record. This capability makes it an invaluable utility for anyone needing to debug corrupted ZIP files, gain a deeper understanding of the official ZIP file format specification, or analyze how different software applications construct ZIP archives. It can precisely show byte offsets, sizes, compression flags, and even portions of the actual compressed data and extended fields, providing an x-ray view into the archive's internals.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>zipdetails</i> is implemented as a Perl script, requiring a Perl interpreter to be installed on the system.<br>The decryption functionality via the <i>-d</i> option depends on the <i>Crypt::Zip</i> Perl module, which may need to be installed separately via CPAN or your distribution's package manager.<br>Providing passwords directly on the command line using <i>-P</i> is generally insecure, as the password could be exposed in system process lists (e.g., `ps`).


title: UNDERSTANDING ZIP FILE STRUCTURE
content:
<i>zipdetails</i> is an indispensable tool for anyone seeking a deep understanding of the intricate ZIP file format. It provides a visual breakdown of elements like the local file headers (for individual entries), the central directory (a master index of all files and their attributes, typically at the end of the archive), and the end of central directory record (marking the end of the archive). This tool brings these normally hidden structural components to light, making complex format details accessible.


title: DEBUGGING CORRUPTED ARCHIVES
content:
When a ZIP file exhibits unexpected behavior, is unreadable by standard tools, or is suspected of corruption, <i>zipdetails</i> can be instrumental in diagnosis. By revealing the byte-level details of each section, it can help identify missing, malformed, or incorrect headers and records, thereby aiding in the understanding of the corruption and potential strategies for repair or data recovery.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zipdetails</i> is distributed as part of the <i>Archive::Zip</i> Perl module, a comprehensive library for creating, manipulating, and reading ZIP archives programmatically. Its development is intrinsically linked to this module's evolution within the Perl ecosystem. It has served as a robust diagnostic utility for low-level ZIP file inspection for a significant period, providing a crucial command-line tool for developers and system administrators working with ZIP data, particularly for debugging and format analysis.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b>, <b>--ignore-case</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignore case distinctions in patterns and input data.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--count</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress normal output; instead print a count of matching lines for each input file within the archive.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--files-with-matches</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress normal output; instead print the name of each input file from which output would normally have been printed.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--invert-match</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Invert the sense of matching, to select non-matching lines.<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--line-number</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prefix each line of output with the 1-based line number within its input file.<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directs <i>zipgrep</i> to pipe the output of <i>unzip -v</i> (verbose archive listing) into <i>grep</i>, rather than the decompressed file contents. This is useful for grepping file names or metadata within the archive itself.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zipgrep</i> is a command-line utility designed to search for specified patterns within files contained inside a ZIP archive. Unlike <i>grep</i> which operates on regular files, <i>zipgrep</i> allows users to directly query the contents of compressed files without first extracting them.<br><br>It functions by decompressing the target files within the ZIP archive on-the-fly and then applying <i>grep</i>-like pattern matching. This makes it particularly useful for quickly finding information in large collections of archived data, log files, or code bases distributed as ZIP files, saving time and disk space by avoiding full extraction. It supports many of the common <i>grep</i> options for pattern matching, case sensitivity, line numbering, and output control.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Caveats and Limitations:</b><br>1. It is typically a shell script wrapper, relying on <i>unzip</i> and <i>grep</i> being available in the system's PATH.<br>2. Performance might be slower than a native compiled tool for very large archives due to the piping mechanism involved.<br>3. May not support all advanced <i>grep</i> options that rely on direct file access or specific pipe behaviors.


title: UNDERLYING MECHANISM
content:
<i>zipgrep</i> functions by piping the standard output of <i>unzip</i> (which decompresses the specified files from the archive to stdout) directly into the standard input of the <i>grep</i> command. This efficient approach avoids the need to extract entire files to disk temporarily, saving time and disk space.


title: PATTERN MATCHING CAPABILITIES
content:
Since <i>zipgrep</i> passes patterns directly to the underlying <i>grep</i> command, it supports the full range of regular expression syntaxes available to <i>grep</i> on your system, including Basic Regular Expressions (BRE) by default, and often Extended Regular Expressions (ERE) with options like <b>-E</b> or Perl-Compatible Regular Expressions (PCRE) with <b>-P</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zipgrep</i> is usually distributed as part of the <i>unzip</i> package, which emerged in the early 1990s. Its design as a shell script leveraging existing tools like <i>unzip</i> and <i>grep</i> embodies the Unix philosophy of combining simple utilities to achieve complex tasks. It has not undergone significant independent development but evolves in conjunction with the primary tools it wraps.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zipinfo</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>zipfile</i> [<i>file(s)</i> ...] [<<i>exlist</i>>]<br><b>zipinfo</b> {-v|-V|-Z} [<i>zipfile</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-b</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show <i>binary</i> compatibility information for specific systems (e.g., VMS).<br><br><b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output entries in a <i>comma-separated</i> format.<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the <i>disk</i> number and byte <i>offset</i> of the local header for each entry.<br><br><b>-D</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display timestamps in the <i>DOS</i> date/time format.<br><br><b>-e</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>extra fields</i> for each entry, if present.<br><br><b>-E</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>extra fields</i> for central directory entries only.<br><br><b>-F</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output <i>fixed</i> information (header fields) only, ignoring the file list.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display only the archive <i>header</i> (central directory and end of central directory records).<br><br><b>-i</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Ignore case</i> when matching filenames within the archive.<br><br><b>-j</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Junk paths</i>; don't print directory names, only the base filename.<br><br><b>-L</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Convert filenames to <i>lowercase</i> for output.<br><br><b>-m</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display information in <i>medium</i> format, a common compromise between short and verbose.<br><br><b>-M</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Pipe output through a <i>pager</i> (e.g., 'more' or 'less').<br><br><b>-n</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>numeric</i> User IDs (UID) and Group IDs (GID) instead of names.<br><br><b>-o</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>original offsets</i> of each entry's local header within the zipfile.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Quiet</i> mode; suppress most informational messages and prompts.<br><br><b>-R</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Recurse</i> into subdirectories (only effective when specifying files to list).<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display information in <i>short</i> format, showing less detail per entry.<br><br><b>-S</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>system</i>-specific information, such as VMS file attributes.<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>total</i> (archive) and <i>trailing</i> (end of central directory) comments.<br><br><b>-T</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>full Unix timestamps</i> (mtime, atime, ctime) if available.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display information in <i>verbose</i> format, showing maximum detail.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>version</i> information for <b>zipinfo</b>.<br><br><b>-z</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display only the <i>zipfile comment</i>.<br><br><b>-Z</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <b>zipinfo</b> <i>version</i> information (same as -V).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>zipinfo</b> command provides comprehensive details about the contents of a zip archive without the need to extract its files. It functions as a powerful inspection tool, displaying metadata for each archived member, such as file permissions, compression method, original and compressed sizes, modification dates, CRC-32 checksums, and extra fields. Unlike <b>unzip</b>, its primary purpose is not extraction but rather a technical listing and verification of an archive's structure and integrity.<br><br>It is particularly useful for quickly assessing an archive's contents, checking for specific files, or debugging issues before committing to a full extraction. <b>zipinfo</b> supports various output formats, from concise summaries to highly verbose listings, and can filter information based on specific files or patterns.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>zipinfo</b> primarily displays metadata; it does not extract or modify archive contents. While it can report issues like CRC errors, it cannot repair corrupted archives. It relies on the metadata stored in the zip file, which might not always perfectly translate to the current operating system's conventions (e.g., file permissions or timestamps). For password-protected archives, it can typically still list filenames and basic metadata, but cannot display information that would require decryption.


title: DEFAULT OUTPUT FORMATS
content:
The default output format of <b>zipinfo</b> depends on whether specific filenames are provided as arguments. When invoked without filenames (e.g., <code>zipinfo archive.zip</code>), it defaults to a verbose (<code>-v</code>) listing, showing extensive details for all members. If specific filenames are given (e.g., <code>zipinfo archive.zip file1.txt</code>), it defaults to a shorter (<code>-s</code>) format, providing a concise one-line summary per entry. The <code>-m</code> (medium) option often offers a good balance of detail.


title: FILE SELECTION AND EXCLUSION
content:
Users can specify one or more <i>file(s)</i> after the <i>zipfile</i> argument to list information only for those matching entries. Additionally, an <i>exlist</i> (exclusion list) can be provided, prefixed with an <code>@</code> symbol (e.g., <code>zipinfo archive.zip @exclude_list.txt</code>), to exclude files listed in the specified text file from the output.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>zipinfo</b> is an integral part of the widely used <I>Info-ZIP</I> project, which began in the early 1990s. The project's goal was to create a set of portable, freely available utilities for manipulating PKZIP-compatible archives across various operating systems. <b>zipinfo</b> was developed alongside <b>zip</b> and <b>unzip</b> to provide a non-extractive way to inspect zip file contents, making it invaluable for quick checks, verification, and understanding archive structures without consuming disk space or decompressing data. Its design emphasizes cross-platform compatibility and adherence to the .ZIP file format specification, ensuring its continued relevance in archive management.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>zipfile</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the ZIP archive file to be commented on.<br><br><b>-w or -m</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write (edit) the archive comment. If a comment already exists, it is loaded into the editor for modification. If no comment exists, the editor starts with a blank slate.<br><br><b>-c or -z</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the archive comment to standard output. If no comment exists, nothing is printed.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provide verbose output, showing more details about the processing.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate in quiet mode, suppressing most non-error messages.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>zipnote</b> is a command-line utility from the Info-ZIP suite designed to add, view, or modify comments embedded within existing <i>.zip</i> archive files. Unlike re-creating an archive to include a comment, <b>zipnote</b> efficiently updates only the central directory portion of the zip file, making it a quick operation, even for very large archives. <br><br> When invoked to add or edit a comment, it launches the user's preferred text editor (defined by the <b>EDITOR</b> or <b>VISUAL</b> environment variables) allowing for easy input of the desired text. This comment can serve as a descriptive note, a version marker, or any other metadata associated with the entire archive. <br><br> For viewing, <b>zipnote</b> simply prints the existing archive comment to standard output. This tool is invaluable for managing and documenting zip files without the overhead of full re-compression or extraction, making it a staple for anyone frequently dealing with compressed archives on Linux systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>EDITOR</b> or <b>VISUAL</b> environment variable must be set for <b>zipnote</b> to open a text editor when adding or editing a comment. If neither is set, it might default to a basic editor like <i>vi</i> or <i>ed</i>, or simply fail.<br><br><b>zipnote</b> modifies the ZIP archive in place. It's always a good practice to back up important files before modifying them.<br><br>The comment is associated with the entire ZIP archive, not with individual files within it.<br><br>Large comments can increase the size of the ZIP file's central directory.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
<b>zipnote</b> respects the <b>EDITOR</b> and <b>VISUAL</b> environment variables. When editing a comment, <b>zipnote</b> will attempt to launch the program specified by <b>EDITOR</b> first. If <b>EDITOR</b> is not set, it will then try <b>VISUAL</b>. If neither is set, its behavior depends on the system's default, often falling back to <i>vi</i> or <i>ed</i>.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
<b>zipnote</b> typically returns an exit status of 0 upon successful execution. Non-zero exit statuses indicate an error, such as an invalid ZIP file, problems writing to the file, or issues launching the editor.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>zipnote</b> is a component of the widely used Info-ZIP software suite, which has been a staple for ZIP archive management on Unix-like systems since the early 1990s. Its development arose from the need for a robust and cross-platform solution for handling PKZIP-compatible archives. <b>zipnote</b> specifically addresses the requirement to manage archive-level metadata without the resource-intensive process of re-compressing the entire archive, maintaining its utility as a quick and efficient tool for adding or updating descriptive notes directly within the ZIP file structure.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-s <I>size</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the maximum size for each output segment. The size can be given in bytes, or with suffixes like 'k' (kilobytes), 'm' (megabytes), 'g' (gigabytes).<br><br><b>-n <I>num_parts</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Divides the input ZIP file into a specified number of parts of roughly equal size. This option is often mutually exclusive with <b>-s</b>.<br><br><b>-o</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrite existing output files without prompting.<br><br><b>-q</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate in quiet mode, suppressing most output messages.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate in verbose mode, providing more detailed information about the splitting process.<br><br><b><I>zipfile</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the existing ZIP archive file to be split.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>zipsplit</b> command is a utility designed to divide a single, large ZIP archive file into multiple smaller ZIP-compatible segments. This functionality is particularly useful for scenarios where the original file size exceeds storage or transfer limits, such as transferring files via email attachments with size restrictions, or distributing data across multiple removable media like older floppy disks.<br><br>When executed, <b>zipsplit</b> reads the input ZIP file and generates a series of new files, typically named with a numeric suffix (e.g., <I>archive.z01</I>, <I>archive.z02</I>, and the final part as <I>archive.zip</I>). These segmented parts can then be individually handled and later re-joined or extracted by compatible ZIP utilities like <b>unzip</b>, provided all parts are present. It effectively manages the internal structure of the ZIP archive across the splits, ensuring data integrity for reconstruction.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>zipsplit</b> is not a universally standard command installed by default on all Linux distributions. Its functionality is often integrated into the main <b>zip</b> utility (e.g., using <I>zip -s</I> option). Users might need to install the <I>zip</I> or <I>unzip</I> package which often includes this utility. The naming convention of the split files (e.g., <I>.z01</I>, <I>.z02</I>, <I>.zip</I>) is specific to the ZIP multi-part archive format. Rejoining these files typically requires a compatible <b>zip</b> or <b>unzip</b> utility that understands multi-part archives.


title: REJOINING SPLIT ARCHIVES
content:
To re-assemble files split by <b>zipsplit</b>, ensure all parts (<I>.z01</I>, <I>.z02</I>, ..., <I>.zip</I>) are in the same directory. You can then use the <b>unzip</b> command on the final <I>.zip</I> part (e.g., <I>unzip archive.zip</I>), and it will automatically find and utilize the preceding parts. Alternatively, some versions of the <b>zip</b> command allow rejoining using options like <I>zip -F</I> (fix) or <I>zip -s 0</I> (create single segment).


title: OUTPUT FILE NAMING
content:
When splitting <I>original.zip</I>, <b>zipsplit</b> typically creates files named <I>original.z01</I>, <I>original.z02</I>, and so on, with the very last part usually being <I>original.zip</I>. This convention is crucial for the <b>unzip</b> utility to correctly identify and reassemble the archive.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of splitting large files, particularly for distribution on removable media, dates back to the early days of personal computing, notably with floppy disk archives. <b>zipsplit</b> (or similar utilities/functionality within ZIP programs) emerged to handle the specific structure of ZIP archives for multi-disk sets, similar to PKZIP's multi-disk capabilities on MS-DOS. While less critical in the era of large storage and high-speed networks, it remains a useful niche tool for specific scenarios, especially when dealing with legacy systems or strict file size limitations.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>[<I>less_options</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Any options understood by the <B>less</B> command. <B>zless</B> passes these options directly to <B>less</B> without processing them itself. For a full list, refer to the <B>less(1)</B> man page.<br><br><b>[<I>file</I> ...]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more paths to compressed or uncompressed files to be viewed. <B>zless</B> will automatically decompress recognized formats. If no file is specified, <B>zless</B> will read from standard input.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <B>zless</B> command is a utility that allows users to view the contents of compressed files using the familiar interface of the <B>less</B> pager. It acts as a wrapper, automatically detecting the compression type (<I>e.g.</I>, Gzip, Bzip2, XZ, Zip) and decompressing the file on the fly before piping its content to <B>less</B>. This eliminates the need for manual decompression, making it highly convenient for quickly inspecting log files, archives, or other compressed data without modifying the original file. It supports multiple compressed files as input, displaying them sequentially.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<B>Dependency:</B> Requires the <B>less</B> pager and appropriate decompression utilities (<I>e.g.</I>, <B>gzip</B>, <B>bzip2</B>, <B>xz</B>, <B>unzip</B>) to be installed and accessible in the system's PATH.<br><br><B>Performance:</B> Viewing very large compressed files can be slow due to the on-the-fly decompression process, especially on systems with limited CPU or I/O resources.<br><br><B>Temporary Files:</B> Some implementations or scenarios might create temporary files during decompression, though often it's done via pipes.<br><br><B>Unsupported Formats:</B> Will fail to display files compressed with unrecognized or unsupported algorithms.


title: HOW IT WORKS
content:
<B>zless</B> typically operates by chaining commands via pipes. When invoked, it determines the compression type of the input file and then invokes the corresponding decompression utility (<I>e.g.</I>, <B>gunzip</B>, <B>bunzip2</B>, <B>unxz</B>) to decompress the file's content to standard output. This decompressed stream is then piped directly to the standard input of the <B>less</B> command. All options and arguments (except for those specifically indicating compressed file paths) provided to <B>zless</B> are generally passed through to <B>less</B>.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
The behavior of <B>zless</B> is heavily influenced by environment variables that affect <B>less</B>. Specifically, the <B>LESS</B> environment variable can be used to pass default command-line options to <B>less</B> automatically every time it is invoked by <B>zless</B>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <B>zless</B> command emerged as a companion to the <B>gzip</B> (or similar compression) utilities, mirroring the functionality of older commands like <B>zmore</B>. As <B>less</B> gained popularity as the preferred pager over <B>more</B> due to its advanced features (like backward navigation and search), <B>zless</B> was developed to provide the same seamless experience for compressed files, integrating the decompression step directly into the viewing workflow. It's often distributed as part of the <B>gzip</B> package or as a standalone script.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zlib-flate</b> <i>[-compress | -decompress] [-level=level] [-raw] [input-file [output-file]]</i><br><br>Choose either <i>-compress</i> or <i>-decompress</i> mode. Input and output files are optional; if not provided, the command operates on <i>stdin</i> and <i>stdout</i>.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-compress</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the operation mode to compress the input data using the zlib <i>DEFLATE</i> algorithm.<br><br><b><b>-decompress</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the operation mode to decompress the input data that was previously compressed with the zlib <i>DEFLATE</i> algorithm.<br><br><b><b>-level=level</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the compression level, where 'level' is an integer from 1 (fastest compression) to 9 (best compression). This option is only applicable when using <i>-compress</i>.<br><br><b><b>-raw</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses raw <i>DEFLATE</i>/<i>INFLATE</i> without the zlib header and checksum. This is useful for handling raw deflate streams, which are sometimes found in non-standard or specific contexts (e.g., certain PDF streams).<br><br><b><i>input-file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the file from which data will be read. If omitted, data is read from standard input (<i>stdin</i>).<br><br><b><i>output-file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the file where the processed data will be written. If omitted, data is written to standard output (<i>stdout</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>zlib-flate</b> command is a utility designed to perform compression and decompression of data using the <i>zlib</i> format, which employs the <i>DEFLATE</i> compression algorithm. It is often distributed as part of the <i>qpdf</i> library suite, which focuses on PDF transformation and inspection.<br><br>This tool is particularly useful for handling data streams that have been compressed with zlib, such as <i>FlateDecode</i> streams found within PDF documents. It operates by reading input data from standard input (<i>stdin</i>) or a specified input file, applying either compression or decompression, and then writing the resulting output to standard output (<i>stdout</i>) or a specified output file.<br><br><b>zlib-flate</b> provides a command-line interface to the underlying zlib library functions, making it a convenient tool for developers, system administrators, and anyone needing to interact with zlib-compressed data outside of a programming environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>zlib-flate</b> is typically not a standalone utility installed globally by default on most Linux distributions. It is commonly bundled as a helper application with other software packages, most notably <i>qpdf</i>.<br><br>Users might need to install <i>qpdf</i> or similar packages to gain access to <b>zlib-flate</b>. Its primary purpose is to interact with <i>zlib</i> streams, not general file compression like <i>gzip</i> or <i>bzip2</i>, which handle different formats and have more advanced features for file archiving.


title: INPUT/OUTPUT BEHAVIOR
content:
By default, <b>zlib-flate</b> reads binary data from standard input (<i>stdin</i>) and writes binary data to standard output (<i>stdout</i>). This makes it suitable for piping with other commands in a Linux shell environment. When <i>input-file</i> or <i>output-file</i> arguments are provided, it operates directly on those files.


title: RELATIONSHIP TO ZLIB LIBRARY
content:
<b>zlib-flate</b> is essentially a command-line wrapper for the <i>zlib</i> compression library. The <i>zlib</i> library implements the <i>DEFLATE</i> compression algorithm (used in <i>gzip</i> and <i>PKZIP</i>) and is widely used for data compression in various applications and network protocols. <b>zlib-flate</b> provides direct access to these low-level compression/decompression capabilities without the overhead of file archiving metadata often found in tools like <i>gzip</i>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>zlib-flate</b> utility emerged as part of the <i>qpdf</i> project, a powerful command-line tool and C++ library for transforming and inspecting PDF files. Its inclusion in <i>qpdf</i> was driven by the necessity to handle <i>FlateDecode</i> compressed streams, a common compression method used within PDF documents, directly from the command line.<br><br>While the underlying <i>zlib</i> compression library itself has a long and established history, dating back to 1995, <b>zlib-flate</b> provides a convenient interface to its core <i>DEFLATE</i>/<i>INFLATE</i> functionalities without requiring custom programming. Its development has mirrored the needs of PDF manipulation and general <i>zlib</i> stream processing.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zm</b><i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]<br><br><i>This represents the general pattern for invoking Zimbra commands. The specific options and arguments vary widely depending on the &lt;command&gt; invoked.</i><br><br><i>Examples:</i><br><b>zmcontrol</b> <i>start</i> | <i>stop</i> | <i>restart</i> | <i>status</i><br><b>zmprov</b> <i>ca</i> <i>user@example.com</i> <i>password</i><br><b>zmmailbox</b> <i>-z</i> <i>getRestURL</i> <i>/service/home/user@example.com/?fmt=tgz</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>zmcontrol</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages Zimbra server processes, including starting, stopping, restarting, and checking the status of services.<br><br><b>zmprov</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The Zimbra Provisioning tool, used for creating, modifying, and deleting accounts, domains, distribution lists, aliases, and other LDAP-backed objects.<br><br><b>zmmailbox</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides command-line access to user mailboxes for operations like creating folders, managing messages, setting user preferences, and importing/exporting data.<br><br><b>zmlogger</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used for managing and configuring Zimbra logging settings and retrieving log information.<br><br><b>zmtlsctl</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Manages TLS/SSL certificates and configurations for Zimbra services.<br><br><b>zmbackup/zmrestore</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Commands related to backing up and restoring Zimbra data, often involving full system or individual account backups.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>zm</b> prefix designates a comprehensive suite of command-line utilities used for managing and administering the Zimbra Collaboration Suite (ZCS). These commands provide powerful control over various aspects of a Zimbra installation, including server operations, user provisioning, mailbox management, logging, security, and more.<br><br>Unlike typical standalone Linux commands, 'zm' itself is not a direct executable but serves as a common prefix for a vast array of specialized tools (e.g., <b>zmcontrol</b>, <b>zmprov</b>, <b>zmmailbox</b>). Administrators use these tools to automate tasks, script complex operations, and perform detailed configurations that may not be available through the graphical administration console. The suite is essential for maintaining the health, performance, and security of a Zimbra environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>zm</b> command prefix is specific to the Zimbra Collaboration Suite and is not a standard Linux utility. It requires a functioning Zimbra installation. Command syntax, options, and arguments are highly specific to each individual <b>zm</b>-prefixed command and often change between Zimbra versions. Always consult the official Zimbra documentation or the specific command's help (e.g., <b>zmprov help</b>) for accurate usage.


title: ENVIRONMENT
content:
Zimbra commands typically need to be run by the 'zimbra' user or by a root user who can switch to the 'zimbra' user context (e.g., using <b>su - zimbra</b>). This ensures proper permissions and access to Zimbra's internal configurations and services.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
While <b>zm</b> commands operate on the Zimbra data store (LDAP, MySQL, filesystem), their behavior and the overall Zimbra environment are governed by configuration files primarily located under the Zimbra installation directory (commonly <i>/opt/zimbra</i>). Key configurations are often stored in LDAP and managed via <b>zmprov</b>, but some settings reside in XML or property files.


title: HISTORY
content:
Zimbra Collaboration Suite was initially developed by Zimbra, Inc., and first released in 2005. It quickly gained popularity as an open-source alternative to Microsoft Exchange. Over the years, Zimbra has been acquired by various companies, including Yahoo!, VMware, Telligent, Synacor, and currently by Vertuoz by VNC. The command-line utilities, especially those prefixed with 'zm', have been a core part of its administration interface since its early days, evolving with the product's features and architecture.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zmap</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i><target_port_or_probe_module_args></i><br><br>Common usage examples:<br><b>zmap</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <b>-p</b> <i><port></i><br><b>zmap</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <b>--probe-module=</b><i><module></i> <b>--output-file=</b><i><output_file></i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-p</b>, <b>--target-port=</b><i><port></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The destination port for TCP or UDP probes. Required for default probe modules.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--output-file=</b><i><path></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;File to write scan results to. Defaults to <i>stdout</i>.<br><br><b><b>-B</b>, <b>--bandwidth=</b><i><rate></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the target sending bandwidth. E.g., <i>10M</i> for 10 Megabits/s, <i>1G</i> for 1 Gigabit/s.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--rate=</b><i><pps></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the target sending rate in packets per second (pps). Overrides <b>--bandwidth</b> if both are specified.<br><br><b><b>-N</b>, <b>--max-targets=</b><i><num></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum number of unique targets to scan before stopping.<br><br><b><b>--probe-module=</b><i><name></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the probe module to use (e.g., <i>tcp_synscan</i>, <i>icmp_echo</i>, <i>udp</i>).<br><br><b><b>--output-module=</b><i><name></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output module to use (e.g., <i>csv</i>, <i>json</i>, <i>redis</i>).<br><br><b><b>-M</b>, <b>--probe-args=</b><i><args></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Arguments to pass to the selected probe module.<br><br><b><b>-O</b>, <b>--output-args=</b><i><args></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Arguments to pass to the selected output module.<br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--interface=</b><i><name></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Network interface to use for sending and receiving packets.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--targets-file=</b><i><path></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;File containing a list of target IP addresses or CIDR ranges to scan.<br><br><b><b>--dryrun</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print scan configuration and exit without actually scanning.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress status updates and non-essential output.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbosity=</b><i><level></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the verbosity level (0-5, default 3).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>zmap</b> is an open-source network scanner designed for high-speed, large-scale network surveys. Unlike traditional port scanners that establish full connections, <b>zmap</b> sends out a high volume of stateless probe packets and analyzes the responses. It can scan the entire IPv4 address space in under 45 minutes on a gigabit Ethernet connection, making it ideal for Internet-wide research, security audits, and identifying vulnerable services. It achieves its speed by crafting raw Ethernet frames directly and distributing probes uniformly across the address space. <b>zmap</b> supports various probe modules (e.g., TCP SYN, ICMP, UDP, DNS) and flexible output modules.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>zmap</b> typically requires <b>root</b> privileges or specific capabilities (e.g., <i>CAP_NET_RAW</i>) to send and receive raw Ethernet frames. Due to its high-speed nature, it can generate significant network traffic, potentially overwhelming target networks, triggering IDS/IPS systems, or violating network usage policies. Users should exercise caution and ensure they have permission before scanning networks they do not own or administer. It is primarily designed for IPv4 networks.


title: PROBE MODULES
content:
<b>zmap</b>'s modular design allows it to support various scanning protocols. Probe modules define the type of packet sent (e.g., <i>TCP SYN</i>, <i>ICMP Echo Request</i>, <i>UDP</i>, <i>DNS</i>, <i>ARP</i>). This flexibility enables <b>zmap</b> to perform diverse types of network surveys beyond simple port scanning.


title: OUTPUT MODULES
content:
Results from <b>zmap</b> scans can be formatted and exported using different output modules. Common output formats include <i>CSV</i> (comma-separated values), <i>JSON</i>, and direct streaming to <i>Redis</i> or other databases. This makes it easy to integrate <b>zmap</b> data into other analysis pipelines or storage systems.


title: PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION
content:
<b>zmap</b> achieves its exceptional speed by operating stateless, meaning it doesn't maintain per-target state during the scan. It uses a cryptographically-generated sequence of IP addresses to distribute probes uniformly and avoids retransmissions. By crafting raw packets and bypassing the kernel's TCP/IP stack for outgoing probes, it maximizes packet generation rates.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed by Zakir Durumeric and collaborators at the University of Michigan, <b>zmap</b> was first publicly released in 2013. It emerged from the need for a tool capable of efficiently scanning the entire Internet for research purposes, a task that traditional scanners like Nmap were too slow to accomplish on a large scale. Its development significantly advanced the field of Internet-wide measurement and security research by providing a fast, scalable, and modular platform for network reconnaissance.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>file</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more compressed or uncompressed text files to view. If no files are specified, <i>zmore</i> reads from standard input.<br><br><b>-<i>NUMBER</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the number of lines per screen to display. This option is passed directly to the underlying <i>more</i> command.<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display helpful messages at the bottom of the screen, such as "[Press space to continue, 'q' to quit.]", instead of just ringing the bell when an invalid key is pressed. Passed to <i>more</i>.<br><br><b>-l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not pause after a form feed (control-L) character. Passed to <i>more</i>.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Squeeze multiple blank lines into a single blank line. This helps in viewing files with excessive whitespace. Passed to <i>more</i>.<br><br><b>+/<i>pattern</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Start displaying text two lines before the first occurrence of the specified <i>pattern</i> in each file. The <i>pattern</i> can be a regular expression. Passed to <i>more</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zmore</i> is a script that allows users to view compressed text files one screen at a time, similar to the <i>more</i> command. It automatically detects and decompresses files compressed with <i>gzip</i>, <i>compress</i>, or <i>pack</i> before piping their content to <i>more</i>. This enables quick browsing of large compressed logs or documentation without manual decompression.<br><br>When multiple files are specified, each file is displayed sequentially. <i>zmore</i> intelligently determines the compression type based on the file extension and invokes the appropriate decompression utility (e.g., <i>gzip -dc</i> or <i>uncompress -c</i>).


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>zmore</i> is essentially a wrapper script around <i>more</i> and decompression utilities (like <i>gzip</i> and <i>uncompress</i>). This design means it inherits the limitations of <i>more</i>, particularly its inability to scroll backward easily, which is a significant disadvantage compared to <i>zless</i>. It also relies on the external decompression tools being present in the system's PATH. While it handles common compression formats like .gz, .Z, and .tgz/.tar.gz, it may not support all compression types.


title: OPERATION PRINCIPLE
content:
<i>zmore</i> operates by creating a pipeline: it first decompresses the input file(s) using an appropriate utility (e.g., <i>gzip -dc</i> for .gz files or <i>uncompress -c</i> for .Z files), and then pipes the decompressed standard output directly to the <i>more</i> command. This means that <i>zmore</i> effectively passes all interactive commands and options to the underlying <i>more</i> program, giving users a familiar interface for navigating the file content.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zmore</i> emerged as part of the <i>gzip</i> compression utility package in the early 1990s. Its creation was driven by the increasing need to efficiently view the contents of compressed files without first decompressing them manually. It provided a convenient solution by leveraging existing standard Unix tools: <i>more</i> for paging and <i>gzip</i>/<i>uncompress</i> for on-the-fly decompression. While <i>zless</i> (a similar wrapper for <i>less</i>) later offered more advanced navigation, <i>zmore</i> remained a simple and effective tool for basic compressed file viewing.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-9</b>, <b>--best</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the slowest compression method, resulting in the highest possible compression ratio. This is equivalent to <i>gzip -9</i>.<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces recompression even if a .gz file with the same name already exists, or if the original file has multiple links. Overwrites existing files without prompt.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the name of each file being recompressed and the percentage reduction achieved.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative path to the <i>gzip</i> program. Useful if <i>gzip</i> is not in the system's PATH or if a specific version is required.<br><br><b><b>-K</b>, <b>--keep</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Keeps (does not delete) the original .Z file after successful recompression. By default, the original file is removed.<br><br><b><i>name ...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more names of files to be recompressed. If no file names are specified, <i>znew</i> reads file names from standard input, one per line.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>znew</i> is a utility designed to efficiently convert files compressed with the older <i>compress(1)</i> utility (typically ending with a .Z extension) into the more modern and widely used <i>gzip(1)</i> format (ending with a .gz extension).<br><br>What makes <i>znew</i> particularly useful is its ability to perform this recompression without first decompressing the original .Z file. This significantly saves time, CPU cycles, and disk space, especially when dealing with large files. It achieves this by reading the compressed data, applying gzip's compression algorithms, and writing out the new .gz file, effectively translating the compression format on the fly.<br><br>It's often a symbolic link to the <i>gzip</i> executable itself, leveraging <i>gzip</i>'s internal capabilities for this specific task. This command is valuable for migrating legacy compressed archives to a more universally compatible and often more efficient compression standard.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>znew</i> renames files from a <i>.Z</i> extension to a <i>.gz</i> extension upon successful recompression. It does not handle directories recursively. Files with multiple hard links require the <i>-f</i> (force) option to be recompressed, and the original file will be deleted only if all links refer to the same inode. It is designed specifically for <i>.Z</i> (compress) files; it will not work on other compressed formats directly.


title: EFFICIENCY
content:
The key advantage of <i>znew</i> is its efficiency. By avoiding the intermediate decompression step, it saves significant time and computational resources, making it ideal for converting large archives or a multitude of smaller ones.


title: UNDERLYING IMPLEMENTATION
content:
In many Linux distributions, <i>znew</i> is not a standalone executable but rather a symbolic link to the <i>gzip</i> program. When invoked as <i>znew</i>, the <i>gzip</i> executable detects this invocation name and behaves accordingly, enabling its specialized recompression mode.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>znew</i> command emerged as part of the <i>gzip</i> package, reflecting the transition in Unix-like systems from the older <i>compress</i> utility (which created <i>.Z</i> files) to the more efficient and widely adopted <i>gzip</i>. Its primary purpose was to facilitate the migration of existing <i>.Z</i> archives to the <i>.gz</i> format without the overhead of a two-step decompression and recompression process. This development made it easier for users and administrators to standardize on <i>gzip</i> while still managing legacy data.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zola</b> &lt;<i>SUBCOMMAND</i>&gt; [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><br>Common Subcommands:<br><i><b>zola init</b></i>: Initializes a new Zola project.<br><i><b>zola build</b></i>: Builds the static site.<br><i><b>zola serve</b></i>: Serves the site locally for development with live reloading.<br><i><b>zola check</b></i>: Checks the site for common issues.<br><i><b>zola highlight</b></i>: Highlights a code file to standard output.<br><i><b>zola shell</b></i>: Spawns a shell with `zola` variables set (useful for themes).


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--config</b> <i>&lt;FILE&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the configuration file. Defaults to `config.toml` in the current directory.<br><br><b><b>--root</b> <i>&lt;DIR&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the root directory of the Zola project. Defaults to the current working directory.<br><br><b><b>--base-url</b> <i>&lt;URL&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Base URL for the site. Often used during build or for testing different environments.<br><br><b><b>--output-dir</b> <i>&lt;DIR&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directory to output the static files. Defaults to `public/` within the project root.<br><br><b><b>--drafts</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include drafts when building or serving the site. Drafts are typically ignored by default.<br><br><b><b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force operations that might otherwise be prevented, e.g., overwriting existing directories during <i><b>init</b></i>.<br><br><b><b>--port</b> <i>&lt;PORT&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the port for the development server (used with <i><b>serve</b></i> subcommand). Defaults to 1111.<br><br><b><b>--interface</b> <i>&lt;IP&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the interface/IP address for the development server to bind to (used with <i><b>serve</b></i> subcommand). Defaults to `127.0.0.1`.<br><br><b><b>--open</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically open the site in your default browser after starting the development server (used with <i><b>serve</b></i> subcommand).<br><br><b><b>--watch-only</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Only watch for changes without serving the site (used with <i><b>serve</b></i> subcommand).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Zola is a powerful, fast, and opinionated static site generator written in Rust. Unlike dynamic content management systems, Zola compiles all content (Markdown files, templates, assets) into static HTML, CSS, and JavaScript files, ready to be served by any web server. It emphasizes performance and simplicity, requiring only a single binary for operation. Zola supports common web development features out-of-the-box, including Markdown for content, Tera (Jinja2-like) for templating, Sass for CSS preprocessing, image processing, syntax highlighting, and a built-in development server. Its strong conventions guide users towards best practices, making it efficient for blogs, portfolios, and documentation sites. Zola's speed, due to its Rust implementation, is a major advantage for large projects.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Zola is not a standard Unix-like command found in most minimal Linux installations; it needs to be explicitly installed. Its functionality is entirely focused on static site generation and requires a specific project structure (e.g., `content`, `templates`, `static` directories) and a `config.toml` file. While fast, large sites with complex templating or many images can still take time to build. It's opinionated, which can be a strength for speed and best practices but a limitation for highly customized or non-standard workflows.


title: TYPICAL WORKFLOW
content:
The typical workflow with Zola involves initializing a new project with <i><b>zola init</b></i>, creating content in Markdown files, designing templates using Tera, configuring the site with <i>config.toml</i>, previewing changes locally with <i><b>zola serve</b></i>, and finally building the static output for deployment using <i><b>zola build</b></i>.


title: CONFIGURATION
content:
Zola relies heavily on its configuration file, typically named <i>config.toml</i>, located at the root of the project. This file defines global settings, such as the site's base URL, title, description, taxonomies, and various build options. Sub-configurations can also be defined within content files (front matter) or individual template files.


title: HISTORY
content:
Zola was created by Vincent Prouillet (known as Keats) and first released around 2018. It was developed in Rust with a primary focus on performance and simplicity, aiming to be a fast, all-in-one solution for static site generation. It quickly gained popularity as an alternative to more established SSGs like Jekyll and Hugo, particularly appealing to developers who appreciate Rust's safety and speed, and those looking for a single-binary solution without external dependencies like Node.js or Ruby. Its development has been consistent, with new features and optimizations regularly added by the community.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-y</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrite the output file if it already exists without prompting. If <I>OUTFILE</I> is not specified, <I>INFILE</I> will be overwritten by default.<br><br><b>-m</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do multiple iterations, which leads to better compression but is much slower. This flag sets a default number of iterations (e.g., 15) which can be overridden by <I>-i</I>.<br><br><b>-i <iterations></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the number of iterations to try. A higher number results in smaller files but significantly increases processing time. Default is usually 15.<br><br><b>-p <filter_strategies></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply specific PNG filter strategies (0-4) to test for optimal compression. Default is to try all filters.<br><br><b>--lossy_transparent</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply a lossy compression to transparent pixels. This can further reduce file size but introduces lossy changes to the alpha channel.<br><br><b>--strip</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Strip all unnecessary chunks (metadata like <I>tEXt</I>, <I>zTXt</I>, <I>iTXt</I>, <I>gAMA</I>, <I>cHRM</I>, <I>sRGB</I>, <I>iCCP</I>, <I>tIME</I>, etc.) from the PNG file, further reducing size.<br><br><b>--keepchunks=<chunk1,chunk2,...></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a comma-separated list of chunk names to keep, even if <I>--strip</I> is used.<br><br><b>--keeptime</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Keep the original modification time of the input file in the output file.<br><br><b>--zlib</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use standard <I>zlib</I> compression instead of Zopfli. This results in faster compression but larger files. Useful for comparison or specific needs.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>zopflipng</b> is a command-line utility designed to losslessly recompress PNG image files to achieve the smallest possible file size. It leverages the Zopfli deflate algorithm, a more exhaustive and slower compression method compared to standard <I>zlib</I>, but one that consistently produces smaller compressed data.<br><br>Unlike some other PNG optimizers that might reduce color depth or remove metadata in a lossy way, <I>zopflipng</I> primarily focuses on optimizing the PNG's <I>IDAT</I> (image data) chunk through a more thorough byte-level search for optimal deflate streams. This process typically results in file size reductions of 5-15% over PNGs compressed with standard methods, making it highly valuable for web assets where every kilobyte counts for faster load times.<br><br>While highly effective at reducing file size without visual quality loss, the exhaustive nature of the Zopfli algorithm means that <I>zopflipng</I> is significantly slower than other compression tools. It offers options to control the optimization intensity, strip metadata, and even apply a controlled lossy compression for transparent pixels if explicitly desired.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Performance Overhead</b>: <I>zopflipng</I> is computationally intensive and very slow due to the exhaustive nature of the Zopfli algorithm. It is best suited for pre-processing assets rather than real-time compression.<br><b>Memory Usage</b>: For very large images, memory consumption can be significant.<br><b>Marginal Gains</b>: On already highly optimized PNGs or very simple images, the file size reduction might be negligible despite the long processing time.<br><b>Lossy Option</b>: Be cautious with the <I>--lossy_transparent</I> option, as it is the only feature that introduces lossy changes to the image data (specifically the alpha channel).


title: COMPRESSION PRINCIPLE
content:
The Zopfli algorithm, unlike standard <I>zlib</I>, performs an exhaustive search for the optimal deflate compression, trying out many more possibilities to find a shorter byte sequence. This 'brute-force' approach guarantees a smaller output size, often pushing the limits of what deflate can achieve, but at a computational cost that makes it orders of magnitude slower than conventional methods. It's ideal for 'compress once, serve many' scenarios.


title: TYPICAL USE CASES
content:
<I>zopflipng</I> is commonly used in web development workflows to optimize image assets for websites and applications, ensuring faster page load times and reduced bandwidth consumption. It's also useful for reducing the size of game assets, mobile application resources, or any scenario where preserving image quality while minimizing file size is critical.


title: HISTORY
content:
The Zopfli compression algorithm was developed by Lode Vandevenne and Jyrki Alakuijala at Google and open-sourced in 2013. Its primary goal was to create a compressor that achieves the highest possible compression ratio for deflate-compatible data, even at the cost of vastly increased computational time. <I>zopflipng</I> is the dedicated command-line tool that applies this powerful algorithm specifically to PNG image files, making it a valuable utility for web developers and designers focused on optimizing image delivery for performance.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zotero</b> [<I>options</I>] [<I>arguments</I>]<br><br><i>Note:</i> The <code>zotero</code> command primarily launches the Zotero GUI. Any additional arguments are usually passed to the application to open specific files (e.g., Zotero data directory) or handle Zotero URIs, depending on the system's desktop environment and Zotero's internal handlers.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed usage information for the <i>Zotero application</i> and exits. This often includes options relevant to the application's runtime.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the <i>version number</i> of the installed Zotero application and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Zotero is a <i>free, open-source reference management tool</i> designed to help researchers, students, and scholars collect, organize, cite, and share research sources. The <code>zotero</code> Linux command serves as the primary method for launching the <b>Zotero desktop application</b>. When executed, it initializes the graphical user interface (GUI), allowing users to manage their research libraries, create bibliographies, and integrate with word processors. It acts as the gateway to Zotero's powerful features, including <i>saving articles from the web, annotating PDFs, syncing data across devices, and generating citations</i> in a multitude of styles. The command itself typically points to a wrapper script that sets up the environment and executes the main Zotero application binary.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <code>zotero</code> command is primarily designed to <i>launch the graphical user interface</i> of the Zotero application. Unlike many traditional command-line utilities, it offers a very limited set of explicit command-line options for direct interaction with the library or data. Most advanced functionalities are accessible only through the Zotero GUI. Its behavior regarding opening specific files or URIs (e.g., <code>zotero://select/library/items/ABCD</code>) is typically handled by the desktop environment's file association mechanisms and Zotero's internal URI handlers once the application is launched, rather than as direct command-line parameters of the <code>zotero</code> wrapper script itself.


title: <B>URI SCHEME INTEGRATION</B>
content:
Zotero supports a <i>custom URI scheme</i> (e.g., <code>zotero://select/library/items/ABCD</code>) that allows deep linking to specific items or collections within a user's Zotero library. While the <code>zotero</code> command itself doesn't directly process these as options, they are registered with the operating system, allowing Zotero to open to the specified content when such URIs are clicked in web browsers or other applications.


title: <B>WORD PROCESSOR INTEGRATION</B>
content:
A core feature of Zotero is its integration with popular word processors like <i>Microsoft Word, LibreOffice, and Google Docs</i>. This allows users to insert citations and generate bibliographies directly from their Zotero library within their documents. The <code>zotero</code> command merely launches the application; the integration itself is managed through plugins installed within the word processors.


title: HISTORY
content:
Zotero was initially developed at the <i>Center for History and New Media</i> at George Mason University, with its first public release in 2006 as a <b>Firefox extension</b>. Its revolutionary approach to web-based research capture quickly gained traction. Over time, as web browser technologies evolved and Zotero's scope expanded beyond just a browser add-on, it transitioned into a <i>standalone desktop application</i>. The first standalone version, Zotero 3.0, was released in 2011, followed by Zotero 4.0 in 2013, and a major rewrite using Electron for Zotero 5.0 in 2017, which brought significant improvements in performance and cross-platform compatibility. The <code>zotero</code> command on Linux systems emerged as the standard way to launch this standalone application, typically a wrapper script pointing to the Electron-based executable, ensuring consistent access for users across various distributions.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
mendeley (Proprietary reference manager), jabref(1) (Open-source BibTeX reference manager), bibtool(1) (Tool for manipulating BibTeX files), xdg-open(1) (Opens files or URLs with the user's preferred application)


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zoxide</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>QUERY</i>]<br><b>zoxide</b> <i>COMMAND</i> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>ARGUMENTS</i>]<br><br>Common aliases: <b>z</b> [<i>QUERY</i>], <b>zi</b> [<i>QUERY</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show help information for the command or subcommand.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the version of zoxide.<br><br><b><b>zoxide query</b> (alias: <b>z</b>)</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Jump to a directory matching the query. This is the primary interactive command.<br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--interactive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(query)</i> Perform an interactive fuzzy search using <b>fzf</b> or <b>skim</b>. Requires one of these tools to be installed.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(query)</i> List all matching directories without changing the current directory.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--score</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(query, ls)</i> Show the score of each directory in the output.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--type</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(query)</i> Filter results by type (e.g., 'dir' for directories). Not commonly used directly.<br><br><b><b>zoxide init</b> <i>&lt;SHELL&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generate the shell integration script for the specified shell (e.g., <i>bash</i>, <i>zsh</i>, <i>fish</i>).<br><br><b><b>--cmd</b> <i>&lt;ALIAS&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(init)</i> Set a custom alias for the <b>zoxide query</b> command (default: <b>z</b>).<br><br><b><b>--hook</b> <i>&lt;HOOK_TYPE&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(init)</i> Choose when to update the database. Options include <i>prompt</i> (default), <i>pwd</i>, <i>none</i>.<br><br><b><b>--no-aliases</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(init)</i> Prevent <i>zoxide</i> from creating the <b>z</b> and <b>zi</b> aliases.<br><br><b><b>--fallback</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(init)</i> Add a fallback mechanism to <b>cd</b> if <i>zoxide</i> cannot find a match.<br><br><b><b>--no-cd</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(init)</i> Do not <b>cd</b> into a directory after a successful jump (useful for scripting).<br><br><b><b>--za</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(init)</i> Enable the <b>za</b> alias for <b>zoxide add</b>.<br><br><b><b>zoxide add</b> <i>&lt;PATH&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Add a specific path to the <i>zoxide</i> database manually. Usually not needed as <i>zoxide</i> learns automatically.<br><br><b><b>zoxide remove</b> <i>&lt;PATH&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove a specific path from the <i>zoxide</i> database.<br><br><b><b>zoxide ls</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all directories currently stored in the <i>zoxide</i> database.<br><br><b><b>zoxide help</b> [<i>COMMAND</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show help information for <i>zoxide</i> or a specific subcommand.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zoxide</i> is a modern, cross-shell <b>cd</b> replacement that learns your most used directories based on your navigation patterns. It allows you to jump to any directory with just a few keystrokes by using a fuzzy search algorithm. Instead of typing out long paths, you can simply type a partial name or a few characters, and <i>zoxide</i> will intelligently find the best match and navigate you there.<br><br>It maintains a database of your frequently visited directories, along with a 'score' for each, which increases with more frequent or recent visits. This makes subsequent jumps to popular locations even quicker and more accurate. <i>zoxide</i> integrates seamlessly with popular shells like Bash, Zsh, Fish, Nushell, and others, offering a highly ergonomic way to traverse your filesystem, significantly enhancing command-line productivity.


title: CAVEATS
content:
For interactive fuzzy search (using <b>zi</b> or <b>z -i</b>), <i>zoxide</i> requires an external fuzzy finder like <b>fzf</b> or <b>skim</b> to be installed and available in your PATH. If these are not present, the interactive mode will not function, though the direct fuzzy search (<b>z</b> <i>query</i>) will still work.


title: SHELL INTEGRATION
content:
To use <i>zoxide</i>, you must initialize it in your shell's configuration file (e.g., <i>.bashrc</i>, <i>.zshrc</i>, <i>config.fish</i>). This is done by adding the line: <code>eval "$(zoxide init &lt;SHELL_NAME&gt;)"</code>. Replace <i>&lt;SHELL_NAME&gt;</i> with your shell (e.g., <i>bash</i>, <i>zsh</i>, <i>fish</i>). This command sets up necessary functions and aliases, like the common <b>z</b> alias.


title: ALIASES
content:
By default, <i>zoxide</i> creates two main aliases for convenience:<br><ul><li><b>z</b>: An alias for <b>zoxide query</b>. This is the primary command used for fuzzy searching and jumping to directories (e.g., <b>z dev</b>).</li><li><b>zi</b>: An alias for <b>zoxide query --interactive</b>. This opens an interactive fuzzy finder (like <b>fzf</b>) to select a directory (e.g., <b>zi</b>).</li></ul>These aliases significantly reduce typing and improve workflow efficiency.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zoxide</i> was created by alecthomas as a modern, Rust-based alternative to similar tools like <i>autojump</i> and <i>fasd</i>. It was designed to be faster, more robust, and easier to integrate across different shells. Its development focused on performance and a minimalist approach, quickly gaining popularity in the command-line utility space since its inception.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zpaq</b> <i>command</i> <i>archive_file</i> [<i>files...</i>] [<i>options</i>]<br><br><b>Common Commands:</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>a</b>: Add files to a new or existing archive.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>x</b>: Extract files from an archive.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>l</b>: List the contents of an archive.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>u</b>: Update or append files to an archive (for incremental backups).<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>t</b>: Test the integrity of an archive.<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>r</b>: Repair a corrupted archive.<br><br><b>Examples:</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>zpaq a backup.zpaq my_docs/ photos/</i><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>zpaq x backup.zpaq</i><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>zpaq l backup.zpaq</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-m<i>level</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the compression level, where <i>level</i> is 0 (no compression) to 5 (maximum compression). Defaults to 3.<br><br><b>-method <i>NAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the compression algorithm to use (e.g., 'zpaq' for context mixing, 'lzma', 'bzip2', 'store').<br><br><b>-id</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables incremental archiving. Only adds new or changed files based on their content ID (hash).<br><br><b>-force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces overwrite of existing files during extraction without prompting.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, displaying more details about the operation.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a self-extracting archive (executable on systems that support it).<br><br><b>-p<i>PASSWORD</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Encrypts the archive with the specified <i>PASSWORD</i>.<br><br><b>-exclude <i>PATTERN</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Excludes files or directories matching the specified <i>PATTERN</i> from the archive.<br><br><b>-include <i>PATTERN</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes only files or directories matching the specified <i>PATTERN</i> in the archive.<br><br><b>-temp <i>DIR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a temporary directory <i>DIR</i> to use during archiving or extraction.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>zpaq</b> is a powerful command-line archiver known for its high compression ratios and advanced features, making it suitable for both general archiving and robust long-term data storage. It employs a sophisticated context-mixing algorithm (PPMD) for excellent compression and supports efficient incremental backups through block-level deduplication based on a rolling checksum. Key capabilities include the ability to store multiple versions of files, create self-extracting archives, and provide robust error correction for enhanced data integrity. <b>zpaq</b> is designed to be versatile, supporting various compression levels and the creation of solid archives. Its design prioritizes both compression efficiency and data reliability, making it a strong choice for demanding archival tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While highly efficient, <b>zpaq</b> is not as widely adopted as more conventional archiving tools like <b>tar</b> combined with <b>gzip</b> or <b>xz</b>. Its unique command syntax and focus on advanced features might present a steeper learning curve for new users. Performance can vary significantly depending on the chosen compression level, data type, and available system memory.


title: DEDUPLICATION
content:
<b>zpaq</b> employs a sophisticated block-level deduplication mechanism. It uses a rolling checksum to identify identical blocks of data within files or across multiple archive versions, storing only unique blocks. This makes it exceptionally efficient for incremental backups, archiving multiple versions of similar files, or storing large datasets with redundant content.


title: ERROR CORRECTION
content:
A significant feature of <b>zpaq</b> is its built-in error correction capabilities. Archives can be designed to include redundant information that allows for the detection and, in many cases, correction of data corruption. This greatly enhances the reliability and longevity of archived data, making it suitable for long-term storage where data integrity is critical.


title: SELF-EXTRACTING ARCHIVES
content:
With the <i>-s</i> option, <b>zpaq</b> can create self-extracting archives. On compatible systems (like Windows with a bundled executable, or Linux with a shell script wrapper), these archives can unpack themselves without requiring <b>zpaq</b> to be separately installed, simplifying distribution and extraction for end-users.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>zpaq</b> was developed by Matt Mahoney, a prominent figure in the field of data compression research, known for his work on PPM (Prediction by Partial Matching) algorithms and the Hutter Prize. It emerged from his ongoing experiments in achieving maximum compression ratios using advanced context-mixing techniques. The project emphasizes robust error correction and efficient incremental archiving, reflecting a focus on both data density and long-term data integrity.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zpool</b> [<<i>options</i>>] <<i>command</i>> [<<i>command_options</i>>] [<<i>arguments</i>>]<br><br>Examples:<br><b>zpool create mypool mirror /dev/sda /dev/sdb</b><br><b>zpool status</b><br><b>zpool add mypool log /dev/sdc</b><br><b>zpool destroy mypool</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>create <pool> [<vdevs>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new ZFS storage pool. Specifies pool name and virtual devices (vdevs) like mirrors, RAID-Z groups, or single disks. Supports options for properties and features.<br><br><b>destroy <pool></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Destroys the specified ZFS storage pool, removing all data and associated ZFS file systems. This operation is irreversible.<br><br><b>status [<pool>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the health and status of ZFS storage pools. Shows vdev layout, device status, errors, and ongoing operations like scrubbing or resilvering.<br><br><b>add <pool> [<vdevs>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds new virtual devices (vdevs) to an existing ZFS pool. Can be used to expand capacity or add redundancy (e.g., adding a new mirror or RAID-Z group).<br><br><b>remove <pool> <device|vdev></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes a device or vdev from the specified pool. Limitations apply; removal is only possible for certain vdev types (e.g., spares, cache, log devices) or if sufficient redundancy exists (e.g., reducing a mirror to a single disk).<br><br><b>list [<pool>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists configured ZFS storage pools, displaying basic information such as size, allocation, free space, and health.<br><br><b>iostat [<pool>] [<interval> [<count>]]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays I/O statistics for ZFS storage pools and their associated devices, useful for performance monitoring.<br><br><b>import [<pool> | <id>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Imports a ZFS storage pool that was previously exported or moved to a new system. Can find pools by name or ID.<br><br><b>export <pool></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exports a ZFS storage pool, making it unavailable on the current system. Prepares the pool for transfer or shutdown.<br><br><b>scrub [<pool>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initiates or resumes a scrub operation on a ZFS pool. A scrub reads all data to verify checksums and repair any silent data corruption.<br><br><b>resilver <pool></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initiates or resumes a resilver operation on a ZFS pool. This occurs automatically when a faulted device in a redundant configuration is replaced or comes back online.<br><br><b>upgrade [<pool>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Upgrades a ZFS pool to the latest supported pool version, enabling new features. This is a one-way operation and cannot be downgraded.<br><br><b>set <property>=<value> <pool></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a ZFS pool property (e.g., autoexpand, cachefile). Each property has specific values and behaviors.<br><br><b>get <property> [<pool>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieves the value of a specified ZFS pool property. Can show all properties for a pool or a specific one.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zpool</i> is the primary command-line utility for managing ZFS storage pools. ZFS is an advanced file system and logical volume manager known for its data integrity, snapshotting, and scalability features. The <i>zpool</i> command allows administrators to create, destroy, extend, monitor, and manage the health of these pools. It interacts directly with the underlying storage devices (disks, partitions, files) to aggregate them into resilient and performant storage structures, such as mirrors (RAID1) or RAID-Z (similar to RAID5/6). Administrators use <i>zpool</i> for tasks like adding or removing devices, checking pool status and health, performing data scrubs, and upgrading pool versions. It is an indispensable tool for anyone managing a ZFS-based storage system.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Operations like <i>destroy</i> and <i>remove</i> are highly destructive and irreversible; extreme caution must be exercised. <br>Misconfiguration of ZFS pools, especially concerning vdev layouts (mirrors, RAID-Z), can lead to data loss or poor performance. <br>All <i>zpool</i> operations typically require root privileges. <br>Pool version compatibility should be considered when importing pools from different ZFS implementations or older systems.


title: VIRTUAL DEVICES (VDEVS)
content:
ZFS pools are built from <i>virtual devices</i> (VDEVs). These can be single disks, mirrors (RAID1), or RAID-Z (RAID5/6-like) groups. Special VDEVs include <i>log devices</i> (SLOG) for synchronous writes and <i>cache devices</i> (L2ARC) for read performance. Understanding VDEVs is crucial for designing resilient and performant ZFS pools with <i>zpool create</i> and <i>zpool add</i>.


title: POOL HEALTH AND MONITORING
content:
The <i>zpool status</i> command is vital for monitoring the health of a ZFS pool. It reports on disk errors, checksum mismatches, and the status of any ongoing operations like scrubbing or resilvering. Regular monitoring and timely action based on <i>zpool status</i> output are key to maintaining data integrity and availability.


title: DATA INTEGRITY AND SELF-HEALING
content:
A core feature of ZFS, managed through <i>zpool</i>, is its end-to-end data integrity. ZFS checksums all data and metadata. If corruption is detected (e.g., during a scrub or read operation), and the pool has redundancy (mirrors, RAID-Z), ZFS can automatically repair the corrupted block using a good copy from another device, a process known as self-healing.


title: HISTORY
content:
ZFS (Zettabyte File System) was originally developed by Sun Microsystems in 2001 and open-sourced as part of OpenSolaris in 2005. The <i>zpool</i> command has been an integral part of ZFS since its inception, providing the core interface for managing storage pools. Following Oracle's acquisition of Sun, ZFS was re-implemented for Linux as ZFS on Linux (ZoL), now part of the OpenZFS project. This re-implementation brought the robust <i>zpool</i> functionality to the Linux environment, where it continues to be actively developed and maintained, gaining new features and performance improvements.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>zramctl</i> [<i>options</i>] [<i>&lt;device&gt;</i>]<br><i>zramctl</i> [-<i>f</i> | --<i>find</i>] [<i>options</i>]<br><i>zramctl</i> [-<i>a</i> | -<i>d</i> | -<i>s</i> | -<i>c</i> | -<i>r</i> | -<i>i</i>] <i>&lt;device&gt;</i> [<i>&lt;size&gt;</i>]<br><i>zramctl</i> [-<i>n</i>] [<i>&lt;number&gt;</i>]<br><i>zramctl</i> [-<i>p</i> | -<i>h</i> | -<i>v</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a, --activate <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activate the specified zram device as a swap device.<br><br><b>-d, --deactivate <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deactivate and free the specified zram device, removing it from swap.<br><br><b>-s, --size <i>&lt;device&gt;</i> [<i>&lt;size&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the uncompressed size of the specified zram device. If <i>&lt;size&gt;</i> is omitted, displays the current size.<br><br><b>-n, --count [<i>&lt;number&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create or remove zram devices to match the specified count. If <i>&lt;number&gt;</i> is omitted, displays the current number of active zram devices.<br><br><b>-c, --compact <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Triggers a memory compaction for the specified zram device, attempting to free unused pages.<br><br><b>-i, --info <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display detailed information and statistics for the specified zram device. This is the default action when a device is specified without other options.<br><br><b>-f, --find</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Find an unused zram device and output its path (e.g., <i>/dev/zram0</i>).<br><br><b>-p, --json</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output information in JSON format, useful for scripting.<br><br><b>-r, --reset <i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reset the specified zram device, freeing all allocated memory and returning it to an uninitialized state.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zramctl</i> is a command-line utility designed to simplify the management and configuration of Zram devices on Linux systems. <b>Zram</b> (previously called <i>compcache</i>) creates a compressed RAM-based block device, primarily used for swap space. By compressing memory pages before writing them to this device, Zram effectively allows a system to use more memory than physically available, improving responsiveness and reducing disk I/O when swap is needed.<br><br><i>zramctl</i> provides a convenient interface to initialize, set size, activate, deactivate, and monitor the status of Zram devices without directly interacting with kernel modules or low-level sysfs entries. It abstracts away the complexities of <i>modprobe</i>, <i>mkswap</i>, <i>swapon</i>, and <i>swapoff</i> for Zram-specific operations, making it easier for users and system administrators to leverage the benefits of compressed swap.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Zram uses RAM, so setting an excessively large size can lead to out-of-memory issues or system instability if the system runs low on actual physical RAM.<br><br>Compression and decompression consume CPU cycles. While generally efficient, heavy swap usage on Zram devices can increase CPU load. Performance depends on the chosen compression algorithm (configurable via kernel modules, not directly by <i>zramctl</i>).<br><br><i>zramctl</i> typically requires root privileges to modify or activate devices.


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR
content:
When called without any options and a <i>&lt;device&gt;</i> argument (e.g., <i>zramctl /dev/zram0</i>), <i>zramctl</i> defaults to displaying information about that specific device, similar to <i>zramctl -i &lt;device&gt;</i>.


title: AUTOMATIC DEVICE CREATION
content:
If <i>zramctl</i> is run with options that require a zram device (e.g., <i>-a</i>, <i>-s</i>), and no specific device is provided, it often tries to find or create an available device automatically, especially when combined with <i>--find</i> or when no zram devices currently exist.


title: PERSISTENT CONFIGURATION
content:
<i>zramctl</i> itself does not provide a mechanism for persistent configuration across reboots. For automatic zram setup at boot, system-specific init scripts (e.g., <i>systemd</i> units like <i>zramswap.service</i>) or other configuration methods are typically used.


title: HISTORY
content:
Zram itself (originally <i>compcache</i>) was introduced into the Linux kernel in version 3.14. <i>zramctl</i> is a relatively modern utility, often part of the <i>util-linux</i> project, which bundles essential system utilities. Its development aimed to provide a more convenient and standardized interface for managing zram devices, abstracting the manual steps previously required (loading modules, setting sizes via sysfs, <i>mkswap</i>, <i>swapon</i>). Its inclusion in <i>util-linux</i> signifies its adoption as a standard tool for zram management.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays <I>help</I> information and exit.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows <I>version</I> information and exit.<br><br><b><b>-I</b> <I>interpreter</I>, <b>--interpreter=</b><I>interpreter</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <I>interpreter</I> to use for the script (e.g., <I>python</I>, <I>perl</I>, <I>bash</I>). Defaults to <I>sh</I> if not specified.<br><br><b><b>-C</b> <I>cwd</I>, <b>--chdir=</b><I>cwd</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Changes the current working <I>directory</I> to <I>cwd</I> before executing the script. Useful for scripts that rely on relative paths.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses informational messages from <b>zrun</b> itself, only showing script output.<br><br><b><b>-d</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables <I>debug</I> mode, providing verbose output about <b>zrun</b>'s internal operations.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <b>zrun</b> is <I>not</I> a standard Linux command found in common distributions. This entry describes a <I>hypothetical</I> utility named <b>zrun</b>, conceptualized to execute a script or command directly from within a compressed archive (e.g., <I>.gz</I>, <I>.zip</I>, <I>.tar.gz</I>) without requiring the user to explicitly decompress it first.<br><br>Its primary purpose would be to streamline the execution of self-contained, compressed scripts or applications, offering a convenient way to run bundled programs or deploy simple tools without manual extraction. It could handle various compression formats by internally piping the decompressed content to a shell or interpreter. The hypothetical <b>zrun</b> aims to enhance efficiency for tasks involving frequently executed compressed content, minimizing disk I/O and temporary file creation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
As <b>zrun</b> is <I>not</I> a standard Linux command, its actual existence and functionality depend entirely on custom implementations. The description provided here is <I>hypothetical</I> and based on common Linux utility patterns. Users should not expect <b>zrun</b> to be available by default on any standard Linux distribution. Any real-world implementation would require careful consideration of security implications, especially when executing arbitrary code from untrusted sources.


title: SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS
content:
Executing scripts from compressed files, especially those downloaded from external sources, poses significant security risks. The hypothetical <b>zrun</b> would inherently be susceptible to arbitrary code execution vulnerabilities if not used with trusted files. Implementations would need robust sandboxing or explicit user confirmation mechanisms for untrusted content.


title: PERFORMANCE
content:
While <b>zrun</b> hypothetically avoids explicit decompression steps, the underlying process still involves decompression in memory or via pipes. For very large scripts or frequent executions, the performance might vary depending on the decompression library and the system's I/O and CPU capabilities. It could offer slight advantages by reducing temporary disk writes.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is no official or widely documented history for a standard <b>zrun</b> command due to its non-existence in mainstream Linux distributions. However, the concept of executing code directly from compressed archives has been explored in various custom scripts and niche tools, often by piping the decompressed content of a script to an interpreter (e.g., <I>gunzip -c script.sh.gz | bash</I>). The hypothetical <b>zrun</b> would formalize this pattern into a dedicated utility, simplifying the syntax and potentially adding features like interpreter detection or temporary environment setup.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zsh</b> [ <i>options</i> ] [ <i>arguments...</i> ]<br><b>zsh</b> [ <i>options</i> ] [ <i>script_file</i> [ <i>arguments...</i> ] ]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-l, --login</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Behave as a login shell. This usually means sourcing <i>.zprofile</i> and <i>.zlogin</i>.<br><br><b>-i, --interactive</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force the shell to be interactive, even if standard input/output are not terminals.<br><br><b>-c, --command <i>string</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read commands from <i>string</i>. If there are arguments, the first argument is assigned to $0, and subsequent arguments to $1, $2, etc.<br><br><b>-s, --stdin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read commands from standard input. This is the default if no <i>script_file</i> is given and standard input is a terminal.<br><br><b>-f, --no-rcs</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skip reading all startup files (<i>.zshenv</i>, <i>.zprofile</i>, <i>.zshrc</i>, <i>.zlogin</i>, <i>.zlogout</i>).<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print shell input lines as they are read. Useful for debugging scripts.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the version number of the <i>zsh</i> executable.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zsh</i> is a powerful Unix shell that functions as both an interactive login shell and a command interpreter for shell scripting. It is an extended version of the Bourne shell (<i>sh</i>) with a large number of enhancements, including features from <i>ksh</i> and <i>csh</i>.<br><br>Key attributes of <i>zsh</i> include highly configurable command-line editing, comprehensive history mechanisms, advanced globbing (wildcard expansion), and a sophisticated completion system that can be programmed for specific commands and arguments. It offers greater customization and more powerful features than many other shells, making it a popular choice for developers and power users who require a flexible and feature-rich command-line environment. Its extensibility through plugins and themes, often managed by community frameworks like Oh My Zsh, further amplifies its utility and user experience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The extensive customization options and powerful features of <i>zsh</i> can lead to a steeper learning curve compared to simpler shells like <i>bash</i>. Complex configurations, especially with numerous plugins, might also impact shell startup performance or resource usage. Users may need to invest time in understanding its various configuration files and options.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<i>zsh</i> uses a series of startup files that are read in a specific order depending on whether the shell is a login shell, interactive shell, or invoked as a script. These include <i>.zshenv</i> (always sourced), <i>.zprofile</i> (for login shells), <i>.zshrc</i> (for interactive shells), <i>.zlogin</i> (after login), and <i>.zlogout</i> (on logout). Understanding their hierarchy is crucial for effective customization.


title: POPULAR FRAMEWORKS
content:
The popularity of <i>zsh</i> has been greatly boosted by community frameworks such as <i>Oh My Zsh</i> and <i>Prezto</i>. These frameworks provide a structured way to manage configurations, themes, and plugins, simplifying the process of customizing <i>zsh</i> and adding advanced functionalities like syntax highlighting, auto-suggestions, and specific command aliases.


title: ADVANCED COMPLETION SYSTEM
content:
One of <i>zsh</i>'s most praised features is its highly programmable completion system. Unlike simpler shell completions, <i>zsh</i> can intelligently complete commands, options, arguments, and even values based on context, file types, or output from other commands. This powerful feature significantly enhances productivity on the command line.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zsh</i> was originally written by <i>Paul Falstad</i> in 1990 while he was a student at Princeton University. Its name is derived from the Yale professor <i>Zhong Shao</i>, whose user ID was 'z'. Over the decades, <i>zsh</i> has evolved through community contributions, gaining significant traction due to its advanced features and flexibility. Its adoption surged further with the advent of community-driven configuration frameworks like <i>Oh My Zsh</i>, which simplify its setup and extend its capabilities, making it accessible to a broader user base beyond just power users.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-C</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recognizes <i>.so</i> even if it is not followed by a space or newline character. This provides more flexibility in how the request can be written.<br><br><b><b>-I DIR</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds <i>DIR</i> to the list of directories to search for files specified in <i>.so</i> requests. Multiple <b>-I</b> options can be used. The search order is the current directory first, then the specified <i>DIR</i>s in the order they appear.<br><br><b><b>-V</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the <i>soelim</i> utility to standard output.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <i>soelim</i> command (often confused with 'zsoelim') serves as a pre-processor for <i>roff</i> (groff/nroff/troff) input files. Its primary function is to expand and include the content of other files specified by the <i>.so</i> request. When <i>soelim</i> encounters a line like <i>.so filename</i>, it replaces that line with the entire content of <i>filename</i>. This mechanism is crucial for modularizing <i>roff</i> source documents, allowing common definitions, macros, or text blocks to be reused across multiple files, similar to the #include directive in C programming. It's frequently used in the context of manual pages (man pages) to include standard macro sets.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>soelim</i> only processes <i>.so</i> requests and does not interpret any other <i>roff</i> macros or commands. It is a simple pre-processor. The functionality of <i>soelim</i> is often implicitly handled or integrated within modern <i>groff</i> tools, making direct manual invocation less common for typical users.


title: CLARIFICATION: 'ZSOELIM' VS. 'SOELIM'
content:
The command 'zsoelim' is not a standard or recognized Linux command. It is highly probable that it is a typographical error for '<b>soelim</b>'. The information provided above pertains to the '<b>soelim</b>' command, which is a legitimate utility within the <i>groff</i> suite for processing <i>.so</i> requests in <i>roff</i> input.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>soelim</i> has been an integral part of the <i>troff</i> and <i>nroff</i> text formatting systems since their early days on Unix, providing a fundamental mechanism for including external files. It became part of the GNU <i>groff</i> (GNU roff) project, which is a free implementation of the <i>troff</i> text-formatting system. Its role in enabling modularity for documents, especially for system manual pages, has remained consistent throughout its development.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zstd</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>FILES</i>...]<br><b>zstd</b> -d [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>FILES</i>...]<br><b>zstd</b> -D <i>DICTIONARY</i> [<i>FILES</i>...]<br><br>When no <i>FILES</i> are specified, <b>zstd</b> reads from standard input and writes to standard output.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-d</b>, <b>--decompress</b>, <b>--uncompress</b>, <b>-x</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decompress specified <i>FILES</i>. If no files are given, reads from stdin.<br><br><b><b>-z</b>, <b>--compress</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compress specified <i>FILES</i> (this is the default behavior).<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrite existing output files without prompting.<br><br><b><b>-k</b>, <b>--keep</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not delete original input files after successful operation.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--stdout</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write to standard output. Original files are kept. Useful for piping.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--output=</b><i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output file name instead of the default.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List information about <b>zstd</b> compressed files (e.g., compressed size, original size, ratio).<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--test</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Test the integrity of compressed <b>zstd</b> files without decompressing them.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--recursive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate on files and subdirectories recursively. When compressing, it creates <i>.zst</i> files; when decompressing, it removes them.<br><br><b><b>-T</b><i>&lt;num&gt;</i>, <b>--threads=</b><i>&lt;num&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the number of worker threads to use for compression/decompression. 0 means use all available cores; 1 means single-threaded.<br><br><b><b>-D</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--dictionary=</b><i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a specified dictionary file for compression or decompression. Improves compression for small, similar data blocks.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display verbose messages and progress information during operation.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all messages, except errors.<br><br><b><b>--rm</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove source files after successful compression or decompression. Similar to <b>mv</b>.<br><br><b><b>-&lt;level&gt;</b> (e.g., <b>-1</b> to <b>-19</b>)</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the compression level. <b>-1</b> is fastest/least compression, <b>-19</b> is slowest/most compression. Default is <b>-3</b>.<br><br><b><b>--ultra</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable ultra compression levels (up to <b>-22</b>) for significantly higher compression ratios, at the cost of much slower compression speed.<br><br><b><b>--fast[=</b><i>&lt;level&gt;</i><b>]</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable faster compression modes. Levels range from <b>1</b> to <b>10</b> (default is <b>1</b>), with higher levels offering slightly better ratio at a speed cost.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Zstandard</i>, commonly referred to as <b>zstd</b>, is a fast lossless compression algorithm and tool developed by Yann Collet at Facebook (now Meta) and open-sourced in 2016.<br><br>It is designed to offer a very wide range of compression ratios and speeds, balancing efficiency with performance. <b>zstd</b> provides excellent compression ratios, comparable to <i>xz</i> (LZMA) for high settings, but with significantly faster decompression speeds, often rivalling or even exceeding <i>gzip</i> and <i>snappy</i>.<br><br>Its key features include high-speed compression and decompression, a configurable compression ratio, support for dictionary compression (which dramatically improves compression of small, similar files), and multi-threading capabilities. <b>zstd</b> is widely adopted in various applications, from real-time data processing and databases to Linux kernel file systems, due to its versatility and robust performance characteristics.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <b>zstd</b> is highly versatile, it's not always a drop-in replacement for older tools like <b>gzip</b> or <b>xz</b> if the exact compression algorithm or specific compatibility is required. Optimal performance with dictionary compression relies on a well-trained dictionary for the specific data type. High compression levels (e.g., <b>--ultra</b>) can be very CPU-intensive, despite <b>zstd</b>'s overall speed.


title: INPUT/OUTPUT HANDLING
content:
By default, <b>zstd</b> reads data from standard input if no input <i>FILES</i> are specified, or if <b>-c</b> (<b>--stdout</b>) is used. It writes compressed or decompressed data to standard output in these cases. Otherwise, it generates output files with a <i>.zst</i> suffix for compression, or removes the suffix for decompression.


title: DICTIONARY COMPRESSION
content:
<b>zstd</b>'s dictionary mode is particularly effective for compressing small, highly redundant data blocks (e.g., log entries, network packets). A dictionary can be generated from a sample dataset using the <b>zstd --train</b> command, and then applied during compression and decompression to significantly boost the compression ratio for similar subsequent data.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>Zstandard</b> was developed by Yann Collet (then at Facebook, now Meta) with the first stable release in August 2016. Its primary motivation was to create a modern compression algorithm that could outperform existing standards like <b>zlib</b> in terms of both speed and compression ratio, especially for real-time applications and large datasets.<br><br>It quickly gained traction due to its performance characteristics and has been integrated into various systems, including the Linux kernel (for filesystems like Btrfs and F2FS, and for SquashFS), databases, and network protocols, establishing itself as a popular choice for high-performance data compression.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code>zstdcat</code> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>FILE...</i>]<br>If no <i>FILE</i> is specified, <code>zstdcat</code> reads from standard input.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>FILE...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more <i>Zstandard</i>-compressed files to decompress. If omitted, <code>zstdcat</code> reads from standard input.<br><br><b>-d, --decompress</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(Implied)</i> Forces decompression. <code>zstdcat</code> inherently operates in decompression mode.<br><br><b>-c, --stdout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>(Implied)</i> Writes the decompressed data to standard output. <code>zstdcat</code> inherently writes to <code>stdout</code>.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all messages, warnings, and errors during operation, except for critical issues.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the <code>zstd</code> version number and exit.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b>-o FILE, --output FILE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decompress the input to the specified <i>FILE</i> instead of standard output.<br><br><b>--no-sparse</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable sparse file creation during decompression, relevant if the output is written to a file.<br><br><b>--check</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verify the integrity of the decompressed data by checking its checksum.<br><br><b>--memory=LIMIT</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a memory usage limit for decompression, in bytes or with common suffixes (K, M, G).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>zstdcat</code> is a specialized utility designed to decompress files compressed with the <i>Zstandard</i> algorithm (typically with a <code>.zst</code> extension) and write the decompressed data directly to standard output (<code>stdout</code>). It functions as a convenient wrapper for the core <code>zstd</code> command, effectively executing <code>zstd --decompress --stdout [FILE...]</code>.<br><br>Its primary purpose is to allow users to view the contents of <i>Zstandard</i>-compressed files without needing to explicitly decompress them to disk first. This makes it ideal for quickly inspecting log files, configuration files, or other text-based data that has been compressed for storage efficiency. You can easily pipe its output to other commands like <code>less</code>, <code>grep</code>, or <code>awk</code> for further processing or viewing, for example, <code>zstdcat mylog.zst | grep "ERROR"</code>.<br><br>When no file arguments are provided, <code>zstdcat</code> reads the compressed data from standard input, enabling it to be part of a pipeline (e.g., <code>curl example.com/data.zst | zstdcat</code>). It is the <i>Zstandard</i> equivalent of <code>zcat</code> for gzip files or <code>xzcat</code> for xz files, providing a consistent interface across different compression formats for immediate content access.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<code>zstdcat</code> is designed exclusively for <i>Zstandard</i> (<code>.zst</code>) compressed files and cannot decompress other formats like gzip or xz.<br>It primarily outputs to standard output, which is generally suitable for text. Care should be taken when piping decompressed binary data to a terminal, as it might lead to unexpected behavior.<br>If the input <code>.zst</code> file is corrupted, <code>zstdcat</code> will report an error and fail to decompress, potentially producing an incomplete or no output.<br>While <i>Zstandard</i> is highly backward compatible, extremely old or malformed <i>Zstandard</i> frames might not be perfectly handled by newer <code>zstdcat</code> versions.


title: PIPING OUTPUT
content:
<code>zstdcat</code> is frequently used in pipelines to process or view the content of compressed files without creating temporary uncompressed files. For example, to view a compressed log file: <code>zstdcat mylog.zst | less</code>. To search within a compressed file: <code>zstdcat data.csv.zst | grep 'pattern'</code>.


title: READING FROM STANDARD INPUT
content:
When invoked without any file arguments, <code>zstdcat</code> automatically reads compressed data from standard input. This allows for flexible use cases, such as decompressing data received from a network stream: <code>curl example.com/data.zst | zstdcat</code>.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <code>zstd</code> compression algorithm and its associated tools, including <code>zstdcat</code>, were developed by <i>Yann Collet</i> at <i>Facebook</i> and open-sourced in 2016. <code>zstdcat</code> was created as part of the <code>zstd</code> suite, following the established convention of <code>zcat</code> (for gzip) and <code>xzcat</code> (for xz), providing a familiar and convenient interface for decompressing <i>Zstandard</i> files directly to standard output without needing to explicitly specify decompression options. Its development is tied to the continuous evolution and adoption of the <i>Zstandard</i> compression format, known for its high compression ratios and extremely fast compression/decompression speeds.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zstdless</b> [<i>less_options</i>] [<i>file...</i>]<br><b>command</b> | <b>zstdless</b> [<i>less_options</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>file...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more paths to Zstandard compressed files (e.g., ending in <i>.zst</i>) to be viewed. If no file is specified, <i>zstdless</i> reads from standard input.<br><br><b><i>less_options</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>zstdless</i> typically passes any options it receives directly to the underlying <i>less</i> pager. Common examples include:<br><b>-i</b>: Ignore case in searches.<br><b>-N</b> or <b>--LINE-NUMBERS</b>: Display line numbers.<br><b>-S</b>: Chop long lines (don't wrap).<br><b>-P</b> <i>prompt</i>: Set the prompt string.<br><b>+G</b>: Go to the end of the file on startup.<br><b>+</b><i>number</i>: Start at the specified line number.<br><b>+</b><i>pattern</i>: Start at the first occurrence of the specified pattern.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zstdless</i> is a utility that allows users to view the contents of files compressed with the Zstandard (ZSTD) compression algorithm without manually decompressing them first. It acts as a convenient wrapper, typically executing <i>zstdcat</i> (or <i>zstd -d -c</i>) to decompress the input file on the fly and then piping the decompressed output directly to the <i>less</i> pager. This enables interactive browsing, searching, and navigation within large compressed text files, similar to how one would use <i>less</i> on an uncompressed file. It's particularly useful for examining log files, documentation, or any text-based data that has been efficiently stored using ZSTD compression, saving disk space and simplifying the viewing process. Users don't need to worry about creating temporary decompressed files.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Requires <i>zstd</i> and <i>less</i></b> to be installed on the system.<br>Primarily designed for viewing <b>text-based</b> ZSTD compressed files. While it might attempt to decompress any <i>.zst</i> file, the output will only be readable if it contains text.<br>Performance can be affected by CPU load for very large files, as decompression occurs on the fly.<br>If the input file is corrupted or not a valid ZSTD archive, <i>zstdless</i> (via <i>zstdcat</i>) will report an error, and <i>less</i> will display an empty or error stream.


title: IMPLEMENTATION
content:
<i>zstdless</i> is typically implemented as a simple shell script, often resembling <code>exec zstdcat "$@" | less</code>. This pipes the decompressed output from <i>zstdcat</i> directly to <i>less</i>. In some environments, <i>zstdless</i> might be a symbolic link to <i>less</i> itself, relying on <i>less</i>'s internal configuration (via <i>LESSOPEN</i> and <i>LESSPIPE</i> environment variables) to automatically detect and decompress ZSTD files before displaying them.


title: AUTOMATIC DECOMPRESSION WITH LESSOPEN
content:
The <i>less</i> pager can be configured to automatically handle compressed files without needing a specific wrapper like <i>zstdless</i>. This is achieved using the <i>LESSOPEN</i> and <i>LESSPIPE</i> environment variables. If <i>LESSOPEN</i> is set to a command that can decompress a <i>.zst</i> file and output it, <i>less</i> will automatically decompress the file when it is opened. For example, a common <i>LESSOPEN</i> script would check the file extension and pipe it through the appropriate `*cat` utility (like <i>zstdcat</i>) if a match is found.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zstdless</i> emerged as a natural extension of the <i>*-less</i> family of commands (like <i>zless</i>, <i>bzless</i>, <i>xzless</i>) following the increasing adoption of the Zstandard compression algorithm. While <i>zstd</i> itself was developed by Facebook and released in 2016, wrapper scripts like <i>zstdless</i> were created by the community or included in distributions to provide a convenient way to interact with <i>.zst</i> files, leveraging the familiar interface of the <i>less</i> pager. Its development reflects the need for on-the-fly decompression and viewing for newer, more efficient compression formats.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zstdmt</b> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] [<I>FILES</I>...]<br><b>zstdmt</b> <I>-d</I> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] [<I>FILES</I>...]<br><b>zstdmt</b> <I>-r</I> [<I>OPTIONS</I>] <I>DIRECTORY</I>...


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-d, --decompress, --uncompress</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decompress. This option overrides the default compression behavior.<br><br><b>-z, --compress</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compress. This is the default operation if no other mode is specified.<br><br><b>-f, --force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overwrite existing output files without prompting.<br><br><b>-k, --keep</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not delete source files after successful compression or decompression.<br><br><b>-o FILE, --output FILE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output filename. If not specified, a default name is used (e.g., adding/removing .zst extension).<br><br><b>-c, --stdout, --to-stdout</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write output to standard output, even if it's a console. Original files are kept when using this option.<br><br><b>-r, --recursive</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate on directories recursively. Processes files within specified directories and subdirectories.<br><br><b>-L#, --level=#</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify compression level. Valid range is 1-22. Higher levels offer better compression but are slower. Default is usually 3.<br><br><b>-T#, --threads=#</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the number of worker threads to use. By default, <i>zstdmt</i> attempts to use all available CPU cores (0 means all available). Set to 1 for single-threaded operation.<br><br><b>--rm</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove source files after successful operation. This is the default behavior for <i>zstdmt</i> when compressing to a file.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all messages and warnings during operation.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display more information and statistics during operation, such as progress updates.<br><br><b>--fast[=#]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable fast compression mode. Higher numbers (e.g., --fast=10) indicate faster compression but generally lower compression ratios. Can be combined with --level.<br><br><b>--check</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verify the integrity of the decompressed data. This is performed after decompression and helps ensure data accuracy.<br><br><b>--list</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display information about Zstandard files (e.g., compressed size, original size, compression ratio) without decompressing them.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zstdmt</i> is a powerful command-line utility for multi-threaded Zstandard compression and decompression. It is a variant of the standard <i>zstd</i> compressor, specifically optimized to leverage multiple CPU cores, making it highly efficient for processing large files or directories. While retaining <i>zstd</i>'s excellent compression ratios and high speeds, <i>zstdmt</i> significantly enhances throughput by parallelizing tasks. This makes it particularly well-suited for environments where rapid data processing and maximum utilization of available computing resources are critical.<br><br>It supports a wide range of compression levels, from very fast (less compression) to ultra (maximum compression), and can operate on single files, multiple files, or recursively on directories. Like its single-threaded counterpart, <i>zstdmt</i> can work with standard input/output streams, making it versatile for scripting and integration into data pipelines. Its primary advantage lies in its ability to achieve substantially faster compression and decompression times on multi-core systems compared to single-threaded solutions.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using more threads (via <i>-T</i> option) significantly increases memory consumption, as each thread requires its own memory buffers for compression/decompression. While <i>zstdmt</i> excels with large files, for very small files, the overhead of multi-threading might negate performance gains, potentially making single-threaded <i>zstd</i> or other tools faster. The specific availability of the <i>zstdmt</i> binary can vary between Linux distributions; some distributions may provide multi-threading capabilities directly within the main <i>zstd(1)</i> command, potentially with a default thread count set based on CPU cores.


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR
content:
By default, when compressing, <i>zstdmt</i> compresses the specified file(s) and replaces them with the compressed version(s), adding the <i>.zst</i> extension. When decompressing, it replaces the <i>.zst</i> file with the original uncompressed data. Use <i>--keep</i> to retain original files or <i>--stdout</i> to write to standard output without modifying source files.


title: OPTIMAL THREAD COUNT
content:
The ideal number of threads (<i>-T#</i>) depends on the system's CPU cores and the nature of the data. For maximum performance, it often defaults to the number of available logical cores. However, using too many threads on I/O-bound operations or systems with limited memory can sometimes lead to diminishing returns or even performance degradation due to contention and increased memory pressure.


title: PIPING AND STREAMS
content:
<i>zstdmt</i> can seamlessly handle data from standard input (<i>stdin</i>) and write to standard output (<i>stdout</i>), making it highly flexible for use in shell pipelines. For example, <code><I>cat large_file.txt | zstdmt -T0 &gt; large_file.txt.zst</I></code> compresses data from a pipe, and <code><I>zstdmt -d large_file.txt.zst -c | less</I></code> decompresses to standard output.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Zstandard</i> (<i>zstd</i>) was developed by Yann Collet at Facebook (now Meta) and publicly released in 2016. It was designed to offer a balance of high compression ratios with very fast compression and decompression speeds, often outperforming older algorithms like <i>gzip</i> and <i>bzip2</i>. From its inception, <i>zstd</i> was designed with multi-threading capabilities in mind to leverage modern multi-core processors. The <i>zstdmt</i> utility specifically highlights and often defaults to utilizing these multi-threading features to provide maximum throughput. Its development reflects the increasing need for high-performance compression solutions in data-intensive applications, cloud computing, and big data environments where processing speed and efficient resource utilization are paramount.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-E &lt;method&gt;, --explore &lt;method&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explores the specified steganography <i>method</i> (e.g., 'lsb', 'zlib', 'all'). This attempts to identify if data is hidden using the given method.<br><br><b>-e &lt;method&gt;, --extract &lt;method&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts data using the specified steganography <i>method</i>. Requires the method to be known or previously identified.<br><br><b>-x, --extract-all</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to extract all hidden data it can find using various methods automatically.<br><br><b>-p &lt;password&gt;, --password &lt;password&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a <i>password</i> to use when attempting to extract password-protected steganographic data.<br><br><b>-b &lt;bits&gt;, --bits &lt;bits&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of Least Significant Bits (LSB) to analyze or extract from, typically used with LSB methods.<br><br><b>-o &lt;offset&gt;, --offset &lt;offset&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines an <i>offset</i> in bytes from where to start analyzing or extracting data, primarily for LSB methods.<br><br><b>-f &lt;filename&gt;, --file &lt;filename&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input <i>filename</i> to analyze. While often provided as a direct argument, this option explicitly sets the input file.<br><br><b>--save &lt;filename&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Saves the extracted data to the specified output <i>filename</i> instead of printing to standard output.<br><br><b>--brute</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables brute-force mode, attempting various combinations of LSB bits and offsets to find hidden data.<br><br><b>--detect-all</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A comprehensive mode that tries all known detection methods to find any hidden data.<br><br><b>-c &lt;charset&gt;, --charset &lt;charset&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a <i>charset</i> for brute-forcing LSB data, e.g., 'printable' or 'ascii'.<br><br><b>-L &lt;level&gt;, --level &lt;level&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the zlib compression <i>level</i> to use when re-compressing or analyzing zlib streams. Used for specific zlib-based techniques.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases verbosity, providing more detailed output during analysis and extraction.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with usage information and available options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zsteg</i> is a command-line utility designed for detecting and extracting hidden data within image files (such as PNG, BMP, GIF, and JPG) that employ steganography, particularly focusing on methods involving zlib compressed streams. It acts as a specialized wrapper that automates the process of identifying steganographic content often used in Capture The Flag (CTF) challenges. Unlike general steganography tools, <i>zsteg</i> excels at finding data embedded within the metadata or pixel data of images, especially when common techniques like Least Significant Bit (LSB) steganography are combined with zlib compression. It can explore potential methods, extract hidden files, and even attempt to brute-force passwords for encrypted stego data.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>zsteg</i> is highly effective for steganography involving zlib compression and common image formats (PNG, BMP, GIF, JPG). However, its effectiveness may be limited against more sophisticated or custom steganographic methods that do not rely on standard zlib streams or known image structures. It primarily focuses on detection and extraction rather than embedding data. Results can sometimes include false positives or fragmented data due to the nature of steganography detection.


title: SUPPORTED FILE TYPES
content:
<i>zsteg</i> primarily focuses on image files that often contain zlib-compressed data streams. This includes, but is not limited to, PNG, BMP, GIF, and JPG images. Its methods are tailored to detect modifications within the internal structure or pixel data of these formats.


title: TYPICAL USE CASES
content:
<i>zsteg</i> is a go-to tool for steganography challenges in CTFs, digital forensics for identifying hidden malicious payloads, and security audits to check for covert channels. Its automated detection capabilities make it useful for initial triage of suspicious image files.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zsteg</i> emerged as a specialized tool within the cybersecurity and Capture The Flag (CTF) community, where steganography challenges are common. Its development was driven by the need for a quick and efficient way to analyze image files for hidden data, particularly when standard tools like <i>steghide</i> or manual analysis with <i>stegsolve</i> proved too slow or cumbersome for zlib-compressed content. It automates several detection heuristics, making it a valuable asset for rapid steganography analysis in competitive hacking scenarios.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increase verbosity, showing more details about the operation.<br><br><b><b>-q</b>, <b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all non-essential output, only showing errors or direct results.<br><br><b><b>--non-interactive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not ask any questions; assume 'yes' to all prompts or abort on error.<br><br><b><b>--root</b> <i><dir></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate on a different root directory instead of the default '/'. Useful for chroot environments.<br><br><b><b>--config</b> <i><file></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a specific configuration file instead of the default '/etc/zypp/zypp.conf'.<br><br><b><b>--gpg-auto-import-keys</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically import new GPG keys that <i>zypper</i> encounters, without asking for confirmation.<br><br><b><b>--no-confirm</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used with commands like <b>install</b> or <b>update</b> to bypass confirmation prompts, proceeding automatically.<br><br><b><b>--download-only</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used with <b>install</b> or <b>update</b> to only download packages without actually installing or updating them.<br><br><b><b>--dry-run</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Used with <b>update</b> or <b>install</b> to simulate the operation without making any actual changes to the system.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zypper</i> is the primary command-line interface for <b>ZYpp</b> (libzypp), the powerful package management engine used by openSUSE and SUSE Linux Enterprise. It provides a comprehensive set of functionalities for managing software packages, repositories, and system updates.<br><br>Users can easily install, update, remove, and query software packages, as well as manage external software repositories. <i>zypper</i> excels in handling complex dependency resolutions, ensuring system consistency and stability during package operations. Its transactional nature allows for reliable updates and offers features like rollbacks in conjunction with tools like <b>snapper</b>.<br><br>Beyond basic package management, <i>zypper</i> supports advanced features such as managing software update services, applying security patches, and performing distribution upgrades, making it an indispensable tool for both system administrators and general users on SUSE-based systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Most <i>zypper</i> operations, especially those that modify the system (e.g., install, update, remove), require <b>root</b> privileges.<br>Dependency resolution can sometimes propose complex solutions; always review proposed changes before confirming them.<br>Network connectivity is essential for downloading packages from remote repositories, and firewall settings might interfere.<br>Large updates or systems with numerous repositories might experience slower performance during metadata refresh and dependency calculation.


title: IMPORTANT CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<i>zypper</i>'s global behavior is configured primarily through the <b>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</b> file, which contains various settings for package management. Repository definitions, which specify the locations of software sources, are stored as individual <i>.repo</i> files within the <b>/etc/zypp/repos.d/</b> directory.


title: SERVICES AND PATCHES
content:
Beyond individual package management, <i>zypper</i> offers advanced capabilities for managing <i>software update services</i> (e.g., connections to SUSE Customer Center for enterprise users) and applying <i>patches</i>. Patches are often curated collections of packages designed to fix bugs, address security vulnerabilities, or introduce specific enhancements. Commands like <b>zypper patch</b> and <b>zypper services</b> facilitate these operations.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>zypper</i> emerged as a core component of the ZYpp (libzypp) project, which was initiated by Novell/SUSE. The goal was to develop a modern, robust, and unified package management engine for their Linux distributions. It aimed to replace older, less integrated tools and provide a consistent command-line interface for both openSUSE and SUSE Linux Enterprise.<br><br>Since its initial introduction, <i>zypper</i> has become the de facto standard package manager for these distributions. It has continually evolved with performance improvements, new features, and tighter integration with underlying system technologies, notably including snapshot and rollback capabilities often provided by <b>snapper</b>.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>{</b> <i>list-of-commands</i>; <b>}</b><br><br><i>Note: The semicolon (<b>;</b>) or a newline before the closing <b>}</b> is mandatory when <b>}</b> is on the same line as the last command within the group. A space is required after <b>{</b> and before <b>}</b>.</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>list-of-commands</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more commands, separated by semicolons (<b>;</b>) or newlines, that are executed sequentially as a single logical unit within the <i>current shell environment</i>. Variables and environment changes made here persist after the group completes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>{</b> character is a special shell <i>reserved word</i> in Bourne-like shells such as Bash, Zsh, and Ksh. It marks the beginning of a <i>command group</i>, also known as a <i>brace group</i> or <i>compound command</i>. When used in conjunction with its closing counterpart, <b>}</b>, it allows multiple commands to be treated as a single unit.<br><br>A key characteristic of a command group formed with <b>{ ... }</b> is that the commands inside are executed in the <i>current shell environment</i>. This means that any variable assignments, directory changes (<b>cd</b>), or function definitions made within the group will persist after the group completes. This behavior contrasts with commands enclosed in parentheses <b>( ... )</b>, which execute in a <i>subshell</i>, where such changes are temporary and do not affect the parent shell.<br><br>Command groups are frequently employed in shell scripting with control flow statements like <b>if</b>, <b>while</b>, <b>for</b>, and <b>case</b> to define the blocks of code to be executed conditionally or iteratively. They can also be used to apply redirections to a series of commands collectively. For example, <b>{ command1; command2; } > output.txt</b> redirects the output of both <b>command1</b> and <b>command2</b> to <b>output.txt</b>. The <b>{</b> must be separated from the first command by whitespace, and a semicolon or newline must precede the closing <b>}</b> if it's on the same line.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>{</b> character must be followed by whitespace. A closing <b>}</b> is mandatory. If the closing <b>}</b> is on the same line as the last command, a semicolon (<b>;</b>) or a newline must precede it. Failing to separate <b>{</b>, <b>}</b> or placing the semicolon can lead to syntax errors. Changes to the shell environment (e.g., variables, current directory) within a <i>brace group</i> persist, which might be an unexpected behavior if one expects subshell isolation.


title: <B>BRACE GROUP VS. SUBSHELL</B>
content:
While both <b>{ ... }</b> (a <i>brace group</i>) and <b>( ... )</b> (a <i>subshell</i>) can group commands, their fundamental difference lies in their execution environment. Commands within a <i>brace group</i> run in the <i>current shell</i>, meaning any changes to shell options, variables, or the working directory are permanent and affect the rest of the script or interactive session. In contrast, commands within a <i>subshell</i> run in a new, independent process. Any changes made within the subshell are local to that subshell and are discarded upon its completion, leaving the parent shell unaffected. For example:<br> <b>{ cd /tmp; echo $PWD; }</b> <i>(changes directory permanently)</i><br> <b>( cd /tmp; echo $PWD; )</b> <i>(changes directory only for the subshell)</i>


title: <B>NOT FOR BRACE EXPANSION</B>
content:
It is important not to confuse the command grouping use of <b>{</b> with <i>brace expansion</i> (e.g., <b>{a,b,c}</b> or <b>{1..5}</b>). Brace expansion is a mechanism that generates new strings from a pattern, typically used for file naming or generating lists (e.g., <b>touch file{1..3}.txt</b> expands to <b>touch file1.txt file2.txt file3.txt</b>). While both use braces, their functionality and context of use are entirely different. Command grouping requires <b>{</b> to be a reserved word, separated by whitespace, and part of a compound command, whereas brace expansion is a form of word splitting/generation.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of command grouping using braces (<b>{ ... }</b>) has been a fundamental part of the Bourne shell (<b>sh</b>) syntax since its inception in the late 1970s. It was designed to provide a way to execute a block of commands within the <i>current shell's context</i>, making it distinct from subshells. This feature was inherited and maintained by all POSIX-compliant shells, including Bash, Ksh, and Zsh, ensuring its widespread and consistent usage in shell scripting for decades.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
As a shell metacharacter, '}' does not have a command synopsis in the traditional sense (like <I>ls</I>). Instead, its synopsis describes its usage within common shell constructs:<BR><BR><b>1. Command Grouping:</b><BR><I>{ command_list; }</I><BR><I>{ command_list; } [redirections]</I><BR><BR><b>2. Brace Expansion:</b><BR><I>prefix{string1,string2,...}suffix</I><BR><I>prefix{start..end}suffix</I><BR><I>prefix{start..end..increment}suffix</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>N/A</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The '}' character is a shell metacharacter and does not accept parameters or options in the conventional sense of a command. Its behavior is context-dependent, dictated by its position within shell syntax.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The '}' character is a fundamental <B>shell metacharacter</B> in Linux, primarily serving two distinct but crucial roles within shell scripting and command-line interactions. <BR><BR>Its most common use is as the closing delimiter for <B>command grouping</B>. When enclosed within curly braces (e.g., <I>{ command_list; }</I>), a series of commands is treated as a single compound command. This grouping allows you to apply redirections (like <I>&gt;</I>, <I>&lt;</I>, <I>| </I>) or execute background processes to the entire block of commands, rather than just the last one. It's often used when the commands need to execute in the current shell environment, unlike subshells created by parentheses (<I>()</I>).<BR><BR>The second significant role of '}' is in <B>brace expansion</B>, a feature supported by shells like Bash, Zsh, and Ksh. This allows for the generation of arbitrary strings based on specific patterns. It can create sequences from a comma-separated list of items (e.g., <I>{foo,bar}</I> expands to 'foo bar') or numeric/alphabetic ranges (e.g., <I>{1..3}</I> expands to '1 2 3'). Brace expansion occurs very early in the shell's parsing process, before other expansions like variable or command substitution.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When used for command grouping (<I>{ ... }</I>), a <B>semicolon (;) or newline</B> must precede the closing '}' unless it's the very first token after the opening '{'. For example, <I>{ command1; command2; }</I> is valid, but <I>{ command1; command2 }</I> is often a syntax error without a trailing semicolon or newline. This is because '{' and '}' are treated as reserved words, and a semicolon or newline is needed to terminate the preceding command list. <BR><BR>Brace expansion patterns are not quoted and are expanded by the shell <B>before filename expansion or word splitting</B>. If brace expansion generates a large number of strings, it can lead to very long command lines, potentially exceeding system limits. Also, the order of expansion is generally left-to-right for lists, and increasing for numeric/alphabetic ranges.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of command grouping using curly braces and brace expansion are long-standing features in Unix-like shells. Command grouping was introduced early in the development of the Bourne shell (<I>sh</I>) to provide a mechanism for treating a sequence of commands as a single unit, essential for redirection and control flow. Brace expansion, while not originally part of the Bourne shell, was later introduced in shells like <I>csh</I> (C shell) and subsequently adopted and enhanced in more modern shells such as <I>bash</I> (Bourne-Again SHell), <I>ksh</I> (Korn shell), and <I>zsh</I> (Z shell). Its inclusion significantly streamlined tasks involving file naming patterns and string generation, becoming a ubiquitous feature in contemporary shell scripting.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
bash(1), sh(1), zsh(1), test(1), [(1), { (metacharacter), ( (metacharacter), ) (metacharacter), ; (metacharacter), | (metacharacter), & (metacharacter), && (metacharacter), || (metacharacter)


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
The tilde symbol itself does not accept options or arguments in the way a command does. Instead, it undergoes shell expansion based on the following patterns:<br><br><b>~</b><br>Expands to the current user's home directory.<br><br><b>~/</b><i>path</i><br>Expands to the current user's home directory followed by the specified <i>path</i>.<br><br><b>~</b><i>user</i><b>/</b><i>path</i><br>Expands to the home directory of the specified <i>user</i>, followed by the optional <i>path</i>.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>~</b> (tilde) symbol is not a traditional Linux command but a powerful shell expansion feature used to represent a user's home directory. When encountered by a shell (like Bash, Zsh, etc.), <b>~</b> is expanded into the absolute path of the current user's home directory <i>before</i> the command line is executed. This provides a concise and portable way to refer to the home directory without needing to know its full path (e.g., /home/username or /root).<br><br>Its primary use is in navigating the file system, accessing files, or specifying paths relative to the home directory. For instance, <b>cd ~</b> will change the current directory to the user's home, and <b>ls ~/documents</b> will list the contents of the 'documents' subdirectory within the home directory. The tilde can also be followed by a specific username (e.g., <b>~john</b>) to represent the home directory of that particular user, provided the user exists and their home directory is accessible. This mechanism simplifies scripting and interactive command-line operations, making paths more readable and less dependent on specific system configurations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>~</b> character is expanded by the shell (e.g., Bash, Zsh) <i>before</i> the command is executed. If a command receives <b>~</b> as an argument without shell expansion, it will treat it as a literal character. Tilde expansion is typically enabled by default but can be disabled in some shell configurations or specific contexts (e.g., within single quotes '').<br><br>In scripts, it is generally recommended to use the <b>$HOME</b> environment variable for robustness and clarity, as it explicitly refers to the home directory of the user running the script, even if <b>~</b> expansion might yield the same result.


title: TILDE EXPANSION MECHANICS
content:
Tilde expansion is one of several types of expansions performed by the shell. When a word begins with an unquoted tilde (<b>~</b>), the shell attempts to perform the expansion. If the tilde is not followed by a username, it expands to the value of the <b>HOME</b> shell variable. If it is followed by a username, the shell looks up the home directory of that user in the system's user database (e.g., <i>/etc/passwd</i>). If the username is invalid or the home directory cannot be found, the tilde remains unexpanded. Tilde expansion occurs relatively early in the shell's parsing process, before variable expansion, command substitution, and filename expansion.


title: TILDE VS. $HOME VARIABLE
content:
While both <b>~</b> and <b>$HOME</b> refer to the user's home directory, they represent different mechanisms. <b>$HOME</b> is an environment variable that stores the full path to the home directory. It can be directly accessed and used in scripts and programs. <b>~</b> is a shell-specific shortcut that the shell <i>interprets</i> and expands to the value of <b>$HOME</b> (or another user's home directory). In interactive use, <b>~</b> is often preferred for its conciseness. In shell scripts, <b>$HOME</b> is often considered more robust because it explicitly references the variable, avoiding any potential ambiguity if tilde expansion rules were to change or be unexpectedly disabled in certain shell environments or specific contexts (e.g., if used within certain quoting scenarios where expansion might be suppressed).


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of the tilde (<b>~</b>) for home directory expansion originated in early Unix shells, specifically the C shell (<i>csh</i>) in the late 1970s. Its utility for simplifying path specification quickly led to its adoption by other popular shells, including the Korn Shell (<i>ksh</i>) and later the Bourne-Again Shell (<i>bash</i>) and Z Shell (<i>zsh</i>). It has since become a standard feature in POSIX-compliant shells, reflecting its enduring value in making command-line interactions more efficient and intuitive for users across various Unix-like operating systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-a, --adaptive</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses adaptive terminal colors.<br><br><b>-b, --nocolor</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces black and white display.<br><br><b>-c, --force-color</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces color display.<br><br><b>-d, --debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enters debug mode for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>-e [file], --edit [file]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the internal editor (<code>mcedit</code>) to open <code>[file]</code>.<br><br><b>-f, --datadir</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the path to the system data directory.<br><br><b>-F, --ftpserver</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the internal FTP server for file transfers.<br><br><b>-g, --gpm-mouse</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces GPM mouse support on the console.<br><br><b>-P [file], --print-pwd [file]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the current working directory to <code>[file]</code>.<br><br><b>-s, --noshell</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables subshell integration.<br><br><b>-u, --subshell</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces subshell support for shell integration.<br><br><b>-v [file], --view [file]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the internal viewer (<code>mcview</code>) to display <code>[file]</code>.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information for Midnight Commander.<br><br><b>-x, --xterm-mouse</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces Xterm mouse support when running in an Xterm-compatible terminal.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>mc.fm</code> is <i>not a standard standalone Linux command</i>. It is highly probable that it refers to <b>mc</b>, the shorthand for <b>Midnight Commander</b>, which is a powerful, full-screen, text-mode twin-panel file manager. The <code>.fm</code> suffix is not part of the standard command name but might be used informally to denote 'file manager' or as an alias in specific user environments.<br><br><b>Midnight Commander</b> provides an intuitive interface for file and directory manipulation, offering features like copying, moving, deleting, creating, and viewing files. It supports advanced operations such as unpacking archives, accessing remote filesystems (via FTP, SFTP, SMB), and interacting with virtual filesystems. It includes an internal text editor (<code>mcedit</code>) and a viewer (<code>mcview</code>), and allows execution of shell commands. Its graphical-like interface and extensive keyboard shortcuts make it a popular choice for managing files in terminal environments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<code>mc.fm</code> is <i>not a recognized standalone command</i> in standard Linux distributions. If encountered, it is most likely an alias, a custom script, or a misremembering of the widely used <b>mc</b> (Midnight Commander) command. Direct execution of <code>mc.fm</code> will typically result in a 'command not found' error unless it has been explicitly defined in the user's shell environment.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>Midnight Commander</b> was originally created by Miguel de Icaza and was first released in 1994. It was designed as a clone of popular DOS file managers like Norton Commander, providing a user-friendly, curses-based interface for file management in Unix-like systems. Over the years, it has been actively developed and maintained by a community of volunteers, becoming a staple tool for system administrators and power users who prefer a graphical file management experience within the terminal environment. Its portability and rich feature set have contributed to its widespread adoption across various Linux and Unix distributions.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-o</b> <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the name of the output executable or object file.<br><br><b><b>-c</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compiles source files to object files without linking, producing <i>.o</i> files.<br><br><b><b>-D</b><i>macro</i>[=<i>val</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines a preprocessor macro, optionally with a specific value.<br><br><b><b>-I</b><i>dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds <i>dir</i> to the list of directories to search for header files.<br><br><b><b>-L</b><i>dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds <i>dir</i> to the list of directories to search for libraries.<br><br><b><b>-l</b><i>library</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Links the program with the specified <i>library</i>.<br><br><b><b>-g</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes debugging information in the output executable.<br><br><b><b>-O</b>[<i>level</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optimizes the compiled code, with an optional level (e.g., <i>-O2</i>, <i>-O3</i>).<br><br><b><b>-std=</b><i>C++_standard</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the C++ language standard to use (e.g., <i>c++11</i>, <i>c++17</i>, <i>c++20</i>).<br><br><b><b>-showme</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the full underlying compiler command that <b>mpic++</b> would execute, without running it. Useful for debugging build issues.<br><br><b><b>-showme:compile</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays only the compile-time flags used by the wrapper.<br><br><b><b>-showme:link</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays only the link-time flags and libraries used by the wrapper.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>mpic++</b> command is a crucial wrapper script designed for compiling and linking C++ applications that utilize the Message Passing Interface (MPI). It acts as a convenient front-end to the underlying C++ compiler (such as <i>g++</i> or <i>clang++</i>), automating the complex process of including the necessary MPI header files and linking against the correct MPI libraries. Developers no longer need to manually specify cumbersome <i>-I</i> (include paths) or <i>-L</i> (library paths) and <i>-l</i> (library names) flags specific to their MPI installation. This automation significantly simplifies the build process for parallel programs, reduces configuration errors, and enhances the portability of MPI C++ code across different systems and MPI implementations (like Open MPI or MPICH). By using <b>mpic++</b>, programmers can focus on writing their parallel logic, trusting that the compilation environment is correctly set up.


